Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro инструкция

User’s Guide

NWA1000 Series

802.11 a/b/g/n/ac Hybrid Access Points

Default Login Details

Version 5.46 Edition 1, 04/2019

LAN IP Address

http://192.168.1.2

OR

DHCP-assigned

User Name

admin

Password

1234

Copyright © 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.

Related Documentation

Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the NWA1000 Series and access the Web Configurator.

CLI Reference Guide

The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and CLI commands to configure the NWA1000 Series.

Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the NWA1000 Series.

Web Configurator Online Help

Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information.

Nebula Control Center User’s Guide

This User’s Guide shows how to manage the NWA1000 Series remotely. Most features of these devices can be managed through Nebula Control Center.

More Information

Go to https://businessforum.zyxel.com for product discussions.

Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the NWA1000 Series.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

2

Document Conventions

Warnings and Notes

These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide.

Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.

Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.

Syntax Conventions

All models in this series may be referred to as the “NWA1000 Series” in this guide.

Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.

A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration > Network > IP Setting means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the Network sub menu and finally the IP Setting tab to get to that screen.

Icons Used in Figures

Figures in this guide may use the following generic icons. The NWA1000 Series icon is not an exact representation of your device.

NWA1000 Series

Router

Switch

Internet

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

3

Contents Overview

Contents Overview

Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

12

Management Modes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

16

Hardware ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

19

Standalone Configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

Standalone Mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

The Web Configurator ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

34

Setup Wizard ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

46

Dashboard …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

52

Monitor …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

58

Network ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

72

Wireless …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

78

User ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

91

AP Profile ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

98

WDS Profile ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

117

Certificates …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

119

System ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

135

Log and Report …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

158

File Manager ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

170

Diagnostics …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

181

LEDs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

183

Antenna Switch ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

186

Reboot ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

188

Shutdown ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

189

Local Management in Cloud Mode …………………………………………………………………………………

190

Cloud Mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

191

The Web Configurator ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

193

Dashboard …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

197

Network ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

199

Troubleshooting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

203

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

4

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Document Conventions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

3

Contents Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

4

Table of Contents …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5

Chapter 1

Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

12

1.1 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

12

1.2 Applications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

1.2.1 MBSSID ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

1.2.2 Dual-Radio ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

14

Chapter 2

Management Modes………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16

2.1 Management Mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16

2.1.1 Mode Changing …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

16

2.2 Standalone AP Roles ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

2.2.1 Root AP …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

17

2.2.2 Repeater ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

18

Chapter 3

Hardware …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

19

3.1 Standalone Mode LEDs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

19

3.1.1 NWA1123-AC PRO ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

19

3.1.2 NWA1123-ACv2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

21

3.1.3 NWA1123-AC HD …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

21

3.1.4 NWA1302-AC …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

23

3.2 Cloud Mode LEDs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

24

3.2.1 NWA1123-AC PRO ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

24

3.2.2 NWA1123-ACv2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

26

3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

26

3.2.4 NWA1302-AC ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

28

Part I: Standalone Configuration

…………………………………………………………. 30

Chapter 4

Standalone Mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

31

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

5

Table of Contents

4.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

31

4.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series ……………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.3

Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series ………………………………………………………………

32

4.4

Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series ………………………………………………………………………

32

Chapter 5

The Web Configurator…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

34

5.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

34

5.2

Accessing the Web Configurator …………………………………………………………………………………….

34

5.3

Navigating the Web Configurator …………………………………………………………………………………..

36

5.3.1 Title Bar …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

37

5.3.2 Navigation Panel ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

40

5.3.3 Warning Messages ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

43

5.3.4 Tables and Lists ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

43

Chapter 6

Setup Wizard………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.1

Accessing the Wizard ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.2

Using the Wizard ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

46

6.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

46

6.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection …………………………………………………………………

47

6.2.3 Step 3 Radio ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

48

6.2.4 Step 4 SSID ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

49

6.2.5 Summary ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

51

Chapter 7

Dashboard…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

52

7.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

52

7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ……………………………………………………………………………

52

7.2 Dashboard ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

52

7.2.1 CPU Usage ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

55

7.2.2 Memory Usage ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

56

Chapter 8

Monitor ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

58

8.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

58

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ……………………………………………………………………………

58

8.2 What You Need to Know …………………………………………………………………………………………………

58

8.3

Network Status ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

59

8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

61

8.4

Radio List ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

62

8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information ……………………………………………………………………………………

63

8.5

Station List ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

65

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

6

Table of Contents

8.6 WDS Link Info …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

66

8.7 Detected Device ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

67

8.8 View Log …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

69

Chapter 9

Network……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

72

9.1 Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

72

9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ……………………………………………………………………………

72

9.2 IP Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

72

9.3 VLAN ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

74

9.4 NCC Discovery ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

77

Chapter 10

Wireless ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

78

10.1 Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

78

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………….

78

10.1.2 What You Need to Know ………………………………………………………………………………………

79

10.2 AP Management …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

79

10.3 Rogue AP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

82

10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List ………………………………………………………………………………….

84

10.4 Load Balancing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

85

10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections …………………………………………………………….

86

10.5 DCS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

87

10.6 Technical Reference ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

88

Chapter 11

User……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

91

11.1 Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

91

11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………….

91

11.1.2 What You Need To Know ………………………………………………………………………………………

91

11.2 User Summary ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

92

11.2.1 Add/Edit User ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

92

11.3 Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

94

11.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings ………………………………………………………………

96

Chapter 12

AP Profile……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

98

12.1 Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

98

12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………….

98

12.1.2 What You Need To Know ………………………………………………………………………………………

98

12.2 Radio …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

99

12.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile …………………………………………………………………………………………

100

12.3 SSID …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

105

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

7

Table of Contents

12.3.1 SSID List ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

105

12.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile ……………………………………………………………………………………………

106

12.4 Security List ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

12.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile ………………………………………………………………………………………

109

12.5 MAC Filter List ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

113

12.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile …………………………………………………………………………………..

113

12.6 Layer-2 Isolation List ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

114

12.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile …………………………………………………………………………

116

Chapter 13

WDS Profile ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

117

13.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

117

13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

117

13.2 WDS Profile …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

117

13.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile …………………………………………………………………………………………..

118

Chapter 14

Certificates ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

119

14.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

119

14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

119

14.1.2 What You Need to Know …………………………………………………………………………………….

119

14.1.3 Verifying a Certificate …………………………………………………………………………………………

121

14.2 My Certificates ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

122

14.2.1 Add My Certificates …………………………………………………………………………………………….

123

14.2.2 Edit My Certificates ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

125

14.2.3 Import Certificates ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

128

14.3 Trusted Certificates ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

129

14.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates ……………………………………………………………………………………….

130

14.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates …………………………………………………………………………………..

133

14.4 Technical Reference ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

134

Chapter 15

System……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

135

15.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

135

15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

135

15.2 Host Name …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

135

15.3 Date and Time ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

136

15.3.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List ………………………………………………………………………….

139

15.3.2 Time Server Synchronization ………………………………………………………………………………..

139

15.4 WWW Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

140

15.4.1 Service Access Limitations …………………………………………………………………………………..

140

15.4.2 System Timeout ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

140

15.4.3 HTTPS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

141

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

8

Table of Contents

15.4.4 Configuring WWW Service Control ………………………………………………………………………

141

15.4.5 HTTPS Example …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

142

15.5

SSH ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

148

15.5.1 How SSH Works ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

149

15.5.2 SSH Implementation on the NWA1000 Series ………………………………………………………..

150

15.5.3 Requirements for Using SSH ………………………………………………………………………………….

150

15.5.4 Configuring SSH …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

150

15.5.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH ……………………………………………………………………

151

15.6

Telnet ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

152

15.7

FTP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

153

15.8 SNMP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

154

15.8.1 Supported MIBs …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

155

15.8.2 SNMP Traps ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

155

15.8.3 Configuring SNMP ……………………………………………………………………………………………….

155

15.8.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile …………………………………………………………….

156

Chapter 16

Log and Report…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

158

16.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

158

16.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter ……………………………………………………………………….

158

16.2

Email Daily Report ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

158

16.3

Log Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

160

16.3.1 Log Setting Screen ………………………………………………………………………………………………

161

16.3.2 Edit System Log Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………..

162

16.3.3 Edit Remote Server ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

166

16.3.4 Active Log Summary ………………………………………………………………………………………….

167

Chapter 17

File Manager ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

170

17.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

170

17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

170

17.1.2 What you Need to Know ……………………………………………………………………………………..

170

17.2

Configuration File ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

171

17.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP ………………………………………………

175

17.3 Firmware Package ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

176

17.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP ………………………………………………………………..

177

17.4

Shell Script …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

178

Chapter 18

Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

181

18.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

181

18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

181

18.2

Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

181

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

9

Table of Contents

Chapter 19

LEDs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

183

19.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

183

19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

183

19.2

Suppression Screen …………………………………………………………………………………………………….

183

19.3

Locator Screen …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

184

Chapter 20

Antenna Switch ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

186

20.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

186

20.1.1 What You Need To Know …………………………………………………………………………………….

186

20.2

Antenna Switch Screen ……………………………………………………………………………………………….

186

Chapter 21

Reboot……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

188

21.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

188

21.1.1 What You Need To Know …………………………………………………………………………………….

188

21.2

Reboot ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

188

Chapter 22

Shutdown …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

189

22.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

189

22.1.1 What You Need To Know …………………………………………………………………………………….

189

22.2 Shutdown …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

189

Part II: Local Management in Cloud Mode…………………………………………

190

Chapter 23

Cloud Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

191

23.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

191

23.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series ………………………………………………………………………….

191

23.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series …………………………………………………………..

192

Chapter 24

The Web Configurator……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

193

24.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

193

24.2

Access …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

193

24.3

Navigating the Web Configurator ……………………………………………………………………………….

194

24.3.1 Title Bar ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

194

24.3.2 Navigation Panel ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

195

24.3.3 Warning Messages ………………………………………………………………………………………………

196

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

10

Table of Contents

Chapter 25

Dashboard……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

197

25.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

197

25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

197

25.2 Dashboard ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

197

Chapter 26

Network……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

199

26.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

199

26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ………………………………………………………………………..

199

26.2

IP Setting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

199

26.3 VLAN …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

201

Chapter 27

Troubleshooting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

203

27.1

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

203

27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED ……………………………………………………………………..

203

27.3 NWA1000 Series Access and Login ………………………………………………………………………………

204

27.4

Internet Access ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

206

27.5

Wireless Connections …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

207

27.6

Resetting the NWA1000 Series ………………………………………………………………………………………

210

27.7

Getting More Troubleshooting Help ……………………………………………………………………………..

211

Appendix A Importing Certificates …………………………………………………………………………………..

212

Appendix B IPv6……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

235

Appendix C Customer Support ………………………………………………………………………………………..

243

Appendix D Legal Information …………………………………………………………………………………………

249

Index ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

258

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

11

CHAPTER 1

Introduction

1.1 Overview

This User’s Guide covers the following models: NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC PRO, NWA1123-AC HD, and NWA1302-AC. Your NWA1000 Series is a wireless Access Point (AP). The NWA1000 Series extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac compatible devices. The NWA1000 Series is able to function both 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks at the same time.

Table 1 NWA1000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES

NWA1123-ACV2

NWA1123-AC

NWA1123-AC HD

NWA1302-AC

PRO

Supported Wireless

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11a

Standards

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11ac

Supported Frequency

2.4 GHz

2.4 GHz

2.4 GHz

2.4 GHz

Bands

5 GHz

5 GHz

5 GHz

5 GHz

Available Security Modes

None

None

None

None

WEP

WEP

WEP

WEP

WPA2

WPA2

WPA2

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-MIX

WPA2-PSK-MIX

WPA2-PSK-MIX

WPA2-PSK-MIX

Number of SSID Profiles

64

64

64

64

Number of Wireless Radios

2

2

2

2

Rogue APs Detection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

WDS (Wireless Distribution

System) — Root AP &

Yes

Yes

No

No

Repeater Modes

Layer-2 Isolation

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Power Detection

No

No

Yes

Yes

Internal Antennas

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Antenna Switch

No

Yes

No

No

LED Locator

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LED Suppression

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cloud Mode

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Maximum number of log

512 event logs and 1024 debug logs

messages

You can set the NWA1000 Series to operate in either standalone or cloud mode. Cloud mode means the device is managed over the Internet using Nebula Control Center (NCC), as discussed in Chapter 23 on page 191. When the NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode, it can serve as a:

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

12

Chapter 1 Introduction

regular AP

root AP

wireless repeater

The root AP or wireless repeaters establish wireless links with other APs in a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS is a wireless connection between two or more APs.

Your NWA1000 Series’s business-class reliability, SMB features, and centralized wireless management make it ideally suited for advanced service delivery in mission-critical networks. It uses Multiple BSSID and VLAN to provide simultaneous independent virtual APs. Additionally, innovations in roaming technology and QoS features eliminate voice call disruptions.

The NWA1000 Series controls network access with Media Access Control (MAC) address filtering, and rogue Access Point (AP) detection. It also provides a high level of network traffic security, supporting IEEE 802.1x, Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption.

Your NWA1000 Series is easy to install, configure and use. The embedded Web-based configurator enables simple, straightforward management and maintenance. See the Quick Start Guide for making hardware connections.

1.2 Applications

This section shows some examples of using the NWA1000 Series in various network environments.

1.2.1 MBSSID

A Basic Service Set (BSS) is the set of devices forming a single wireless network (usually an access point and one or more wireless clients). The Service Set IDentifier (SSID) is the name of a BSS. In Multiple BSS (MBSSID) mode, the NWA1000 Series provides multiple virtual APs, each forming its own BSS and using its own individual SSID profile.

You can configure multiple SSID profiles, and have all of them active at any one time.

You can assign different wireless and security settings to each SSID profile. This allows you to compartmentalize groups of users, set varying access privileges, and prioritize network traffic to and from certain BSSs.

To the wireless clients in the network, each SSID appears to be a different access point. As in any wireless network, clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings.

For example, you might want to set up a wireless network in your office where Internet telephony (VoIP) users have priority. You also want a regular wireless network for standard users, as well as a ‘guest’ wireless network for visitors. In the following figure, VoIP_SSID users have QoS priority, SSID01 is the wireless network for standard users, and Guest_SSID is the wireless network for guest users. In this example, the guest user is forbidden access to the wired Land Area Network (LAN) behind the AP and can access only the Internet.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

13

Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 1 Multiple BSSs

1.2.2 Dual-Radio

Some of the NWA1000 Series models are equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can configure two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously.

Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the effects of radio interference.

You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

14

Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 2 Dual-Radio Application

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

15

Chapter 2 Management Modes

CHAPTER 2

Management Modes

2.1 Management Mode

The NWA1000 Series is a hybrid access point, which means it can work either in standalone mode or in Nebula Cloud Management Mode (cloud mode).

Standalone

By default, the NWA1000 Series serves as a normal AP and is to be configured using its built-in web configurator or CLI (Command Line Interface), See Chapter 4 on page 31 for detailed information about the web configurator screens.

Nebula Cloud Management

In this mode, you can manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series through the Zyxel Nebula cloud-based network management system. See the NCC (Nebula Control Center) User’s Guide for how to configure Nebula managed devices. See Chapter 23 on page 191 if you want to change the NWA1000 Series’s VLAN setting or manually set its IP address.

2.1.1 Mode Changing

This section describes how to change the NWA1000 Series’s management mode.

From Standalone to Cloud

To manage your NWA1000 Series via the Zyxel NCC, connect the NWA1000 Series to the Internet and register it to a site and organization in the NCC (http://nebula.zyxel.com) first using its serial number and MAC address or its QR code. The serial number, MAC address and QR code can be found in the web configurator dashboard or the label on the device. See the corresponding Quick Start Guide for how to do hardware connections and device registration.

Note: The NWA1000 Series automatically goes into cloud mode after it can access the NCC through the specified proxy server (if any) and is successfully registered in the NCC. Its login password and wireless settings are then overwritten with what you have configured in the NCC.

From Cloud to Standalone

To return to the default standalone mode, just click Unregister to remove the NWA1000 Series from the organization/site in the NCC. The NWA1000 Series will reboot and restore the factory default settings.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

16

Chapter 2 Management Modes

2.2 Standalone AP Roles

Depending on your network setup, your NWA1000 Series in standalone mode can adopt the following roles.

2.2.1 Root AP

The NWA1000 Series (Z) can act as the root AP in a wireless network and also allow repeaters (X and Y) to extend the range of its wireless network at the same time. In the figure below, both clients A, B and C can access the wired network through the root AP.

Figure 3 Root AP Application

On the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode, you can have multiple SSIDs active for regular wireless connections and one SSID for the connection with a repeater (repeater SSID). Wireless clients can use either SSID to associate with the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode. A repeater must use the repeater SSID to connect to the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode.

When the NWA1000 Series is in Root AP mode, repeater security between the NWA1000 Series and other repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section 10.2 on page 79 and Section 13.2 on page 117 for more details.

Unless specified, the term “security settings” refers to the traffic between the wireless clients and the AP. At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA1000 Series only.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

17

Chapter 2 Management Modes

2.2.2 Repeater

The NWA1000 Series can act as a wireless network repeater to extend a root AP’s wireless network range, and also establish wireless connections with wireless clients.

Using Repeater mode, your NWA1000 Series can extend the range of the WLAN. In the figure below, the NWA1000 Series in Repeater mode (Z) has a wireless connection to the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode (X) which is connected to a wired network and also has a wireless connection to another NWA1000 Series in Repeater mode (Y) at the same time. Z and Y act as repeaters that forward traffic between associated wireless clients and the wired LAN. Clients A and B access the AP and the wired network behind the AP through repeaters Z and Y.

Figure 4 Repeater Application

When the NWA1000 Series is in Repeater mode, repeater security between the NWA1000 Series and other repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section 10.2 on page 79 and Section 13.2 on page 117 for more details.

Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.

At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA1000 Series only.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

18

Chapter 3 Hardware

CHAPTER 3

Hardware

See your Quick Start Guide for information on making hardware connections.

3.1 Standalone Mode LEDs

The LEDs of your NWA1000 Series can be controlled by using the Suppression feature such that the LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the device is ready.

Following are LED descriptions for the NWA1000 Series series models in standalone mode.

3.1.1 NWA1123-AC PRO

The LEDs will stay ON when the NWA1123-AC PRO is ready. You can change this setting in the

Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression screen.

Figure 5 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

19

Chapter 3 Hardware

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 2 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS

Red

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the

sec, Off for 1 sec)

NWA1000 Series is booting up.

Green

On

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.

Red

On

There is system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot

boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.

Red

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

Red

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

The Uplink port is disconnected.

times, Off for 3 sec)

Green

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or

sec, Off for 1 sec)

failed.

Management

Green/

Off

The NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode.

Amber

WLAN

Green

On

The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Amber

On

The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN

Green

On

The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Amber

On

The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

UPLINK

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.

Green

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through

the port.

Off

The port is not connected.

LAN

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.

Green

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.

Off

The LAN port is not connected.

Locator

White

Blinking

The Locator is activated and will show the actual location

of the NWA1000 Series between several devices in the

network.

Off

The Locator function is off.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

20

Chapter 3 Hardware

3.1.2 NWA1123-ACv2

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.

Figure 6 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1000 Series.

Table 3 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Amber

Blinks amber for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the NWA1000

second and green for

Series is booting up.

Green

1 second alternatively.

Green

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use and its wireless interface is

activated.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or failed.

sec, Off for 1 sec)

Red

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

Slow Blinking (Blink for

The Uplink port is disconnected.

3 times, Off for 3 sec)

3.1.3 NWA1123-AC HD

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

21

Chapter 3 Hardware

Figure 7 NWA1123-AC HD LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1000 Series.

Table 4 NWA1123-AC HD LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Amber

Blinks amber for 1 second

The NWA1000 Series is booting up.

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

Green

Green

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or fails,

second, Off for 1 second)

the NWA1000 Series is using default wireless settings.

Green

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s

wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are

connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power

using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).

Amber

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s

wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are

connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power

using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).

Bright Blue

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it receives power

using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).

White

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it receives power

using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).

Blue

Slow Blinking (Blink for 1

The NWA1000 Series is performing a Channel Availability

time, Off for 1 second)

Check (CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to

monitor a channel for radar signals.

Red

On

The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system

failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.

milliseconds, Off for 50

milliseconds)

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

The Uplink port of the NWA1000 Series is disconnected.

times, Off for 3 seconds)

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

22

Chapter 3 Hardware

3.1.4 NWA1302-AC

By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the Suppression On option is selected in the LEDs > Suppression screen (see Section 19.2 on page 183) to turn off the LEDs, you can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes.

Figure 8 NWA1302-AC LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 5 NWA1302-AC LEDs

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS

Red

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the

sec, Off for 1 sec)

NWA1000 Series is booting up.

Green

On

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or

sec, Off for 1 sec)

failed.

Red

On

There is system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot

boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

The Uplink port is disconnected.

times, Off for 3 sec)

Management

Green/

Off

The NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode.

Amber

UPLINK

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps

Green

connection.

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through

the port.

Off

The port is not connected.

WLAN

Green

On

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

23

Chapter 3 Hardware

Table 5 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued)

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

WLAN

Green

On

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

LAN

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps

Green

connection.

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.

Off

The LAN port is not connected.

3.2 Cloud Mode LEDs

Following are LED descriptions for the NWA1000 Series series models in cloud mode.

3.2.1 NWA1123-AC PRO

The LEDs will stay ON when the NWA1123-AC PRO is ready. You can change this setting through the NCC (Nebula Control Center).

Figure 9 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

24

Chapter 3 Hardware

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 6 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS

Red

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the

sec, Off for 1 sec)

NWA1000 Series is booting up.

Green

On

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or

sec, Off for 1 sec)

failed.

Red

On

There is a system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot boot

up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

The Uplink port is disconnected.

times, Off for 3 sec)

Management

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is managed by the NCC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not

sec, Off for 1 sec)

registered.

Amber

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The NWA1000 Series is searching for (discovering) the NCC.

sec, Off for 1 sec)

WLAN

Green

On

The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Amber

On

The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN

Green

On

The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Amber

On

The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

UPLINK

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.

Green

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking

The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through the

port.

Off

The port is not connected.

LAN

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.

Green

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking

The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.

Off

The LAN port is not connected.

Locator

White

Blinking

The Locator is activated and will show the actual location

of the NWA1000 Series between several devices in the

network.

Off

The Locator function is off.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

25

Chapter 3 Hardware

3.2.2 NWA1123-ACv2

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.

Figure 10 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.

Table 7 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Amber

Blinks amber for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the NWA1000

second and green for

Series is booting up.

Green

1 second alternatively.

Amber

Blinks amber and

The NWA1000 Series is discovering the NCC.

green alternatively 3

Green

times and then turns

solid green for 3

seconds.

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use and its wireless interface is

activated.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or failed, or

sec, Off for 1 sec)

the NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not registered.

Red

On

The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

26

Chapter 3 Hardware

Figure 11 NWA1123-AC HD LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.

Table 8 NWA1123-AC HD LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Amber

Blinks amber for 1 second

The NWA1000 Series is booting up.

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

Green

Amber

Blinks amber and green

The NWA1000 Series is discovering the NCC.

alternatively 3 times and

Green

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

Green

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or fails,

second, Off for 1 second)

the NWA1000 Series is in cloud mode but not registered with

the NCC.

Green

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s

wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are

connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power

using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).

Amber

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s

wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are

connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power

using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).

Bright Blue

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it receives power

using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).

White

Steady On

The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it receives power

using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).

Blue

Slow Blinking (Blink for 1

The NWA1000 Series is performing a Channel Availability

time, Off for 1 second)

Check (CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to

monitor a channel for radar signals.

Red

On

The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system

failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.

milliseconds, Off for 50

milliseconds)

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

27

Chapter 3 Hardware

3.2.4 NWA1302-AC

By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the LEDs are turned off by the NCC, you can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes.

Figure 12 MWA1302-AC LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 9 NWA1302-AC LEDs

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS

Red

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the

sec, Off for 1 sec)

NWA1000 Series is booting up.

Green

On

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or

sec, Off for 1 sec)

failed.

Red

On

There is a system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot

boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.

ms, Off for 50 ms)

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

The Uplink port is disconnected.

times, Off for 3 sec)

Management

Green

On

The NWA1000 Series is managed by the NCC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not

sec, Off for 1 sec)

registered.

Amber

Slow Blinking (On for 1

The NWA1000 Series is searching for (discovering) the

sec, Off for 1sec)

NCC.

UPLINK

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps

Green

connection.

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through

the port.

Off

The port is not connected.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

28

Chapter 3 Hardware

Table 9 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued)

LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

WLAN

Green

On

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN

Green

On

The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off

The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

LAN

Amber/

On

Amber — The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps

Green

connection.

Green — The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps).

Blinking

The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.

Off

The LAN port is not connected.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

29

PART I

Standalone

Configuration

30

CHAPTER 4

Standalone Mode

4.1 Overview

The NWA1000 Series operates in standalone mode by default. Use the web configurator to manage and configure it directly. As shown in the following figure, wireless clients can connect to the NWA1000 Series (A) to access network resources.

4.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series

You can use the following ways to manage the NWA1000 Series.

Web Configurator

The Web Configurator allows easy NWA1000 Series setup and management using an Internet browser. This User’s Guide provides information about the Web Configurator.

Command-Line Interface (CLI)

The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the NWA1000 Series. You can access it using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet). See the Command Reference Guide for more information.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

31

Chapter 4 Standalone Mode

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

The NWA1000 Series can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this User’s Guide.

4.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series

Do the following things regularly to make the NWA1000 Series more secure and to manage it more effectively.

Change the password often. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.

Write down the password and put it in a safe place.

Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NWA1000 Series to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you won’t have to totally re-configure the NWA1000 Series; you can simply restore your last configuration.

4.4Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series

Here are some of the ways to start and stop the NWA1000 Series.

Always use Maintenance > Shutdown or the shutdown command before you turn off the NWA1000 Series or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.

Table 10 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series

METHOD

DESCRIPTION

Turning on the power

A cold start occurs when you turn on the power to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000

Series powers up, checks the hardware, and starts the system processes.

Rebooting the

A warm start (without powering down and powering up again) occurs when you use the

NWA1000 Series

Reboot button in the Reboot screen or when you use the reboot command. The

NWA1000 Series writes all cached data to the local storage, stops the system processes,

and then does a warm start.

Using the RESET button

If you press the RESET button on the back of the NWA1000 Series, the NWA1000 Series sets

the configuration to its default values and then reboots. See Section 27.6 on page 210 for

more information.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

32

Chapter 4 Standalone Mode

Table 10 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series

METHOD

DESCRIPTION

Clicking Maintenance

Clicking Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or using the shutdown command writes all

> Shutdown >

cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Wait for the device to

Shutdown or using the

shut down and then manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the

shutdown command

power.

Disconnecting the

Power off occurs when you turn off the power to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series

power

simply turns off. It does not stop the system processes or write cached data to local

storage.

The NWA1000 Series does not stop or start the system processes when you apply configuration files or run shell scripts although you may temporarily lose access to network resources.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

33

CHAPTER 5

The Web Configurator

5.1 Overview

The NWA1000 Series Web Configurator allows easy management using an Internet browser.

In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:

Use Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 36.0 and later versions, Safari 9.0 and later versions, or Google Chrome 38.0 and later versions.

Allow pop-up windows.

Enable JavaScript (enabled by default).

Enable Java permissions (enabled by default).

Enable cookies.

The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher.

5.2Accessing the Web Configurator

1Make sure your NWA1000 Series is working in standalone mode (see Section 1.2.1 on page 13) and hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.

2If the NWA1000 Series and your computer are not connected to a DHCP server, make sure your computer’s IP address is in the range between «192.168.1.3» and «192.168.1.254».

3Browse to the NWA1000 Series’s DHCP-assigned IP address or http://192.168.1.2. The Login screen appears.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

34

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

4Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”). Click Login.

Click the Visit button if you want to open the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) login page in a new tab or window. The NCC is a cloud-based network management system that allows you to remotely manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series in cloud mode (see Section 1.2.1 on page 13).

5If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears. Otherwise, the dashboard appears.

The Update Admin Info screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and default password. If you change the password for the default user account, this screen does not appear anymore.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

35

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

6Each time you log into the web configurator, a Message center screen will pop up showing the QR code of the NWA1000 Series. Use the Zyxel Nebula Mobile app to scan the QR code. The NWA1000 Series will be registered and assigned to an existing site/organization in the NCC automatically. Click OK to close the screen.

5.3 Navigating the Web Configurator

The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. This guide uses the NWA1123-AC HD screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

36

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Figure 13 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen

A

B C

The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:

A — Title Bar

B — Navigation Panel

C — Main Window

5.3.1Title Bar

The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how deep into the Web Configurator you navigate.

Figure 14 Title Bar

The icons provide the following functions.

Table 11 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Logout

Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.

Wizard

Click this to open the wizard. See Chapter 6 on page 46 for more information.

Help

Click this to open the help page for the current screen.

About

Click this to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.

Site Map

Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens.

Object

Click this to open a screen where you can check which configuration items reference an

Reference

object.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

37

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Table 11 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons (continued)

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

CLI

Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web

Configurator.

nebula

Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window.

About

Click About to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.

Figure 15 About

The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 12 About

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Boot Module

This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the

NWA1000 Series.

Current Version

This shows the firmware version of the NWA1000 Series.

Released Date

This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released.

OK

Click this to close the screen.

Site Map

Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screen’s link to go to that screen.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

38

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Figure 16 Site Map

Object Reference

Click Object Reference to open the Object Reference screen. Select the type of object and the individual object and click Refresh to show which configuration settings reference the object.

Figure 17 Object Reference

The fields vary with the type of object. The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.

Table 13 Object References

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Object Name

This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the

object’s name to display the object’s configuration screen in the main window.

#

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.

Service

This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a service’s name to display

the service’s configuration screen in the main window.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

39

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Table 13 Object References (continued)

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Priority

If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration item’s position in its list, otherwise

N/A displays.

Name

This field identifies the configuration item that references the object.

Description

If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here.

Refresh

Click this to update the information in this screen.

Cancel

Click Cancel to close the screen.

CLI Messages

Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. These commands appear in a popup window, such as the following.

Figure 18 CLI Messages

Click Clear to remove the currently displayed information.

Note: See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.

5.3.2 Navigation Panel

Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NWA1000 Series features. Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel menus or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the NWA1000 Series’s navigation panel menus and their screens.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

40

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Figure 19 Navigation Panel

Dashboard

The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs.

For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 7 on page 52.

Monitor Menu

The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.

Table 14 Monitor Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK

TAB

FUNCTION

Network Status

Network

Display general LAN interface information and packet statistics.

Status

Wireless

AP Information

Radio List

Display information about the radios of the connected APs.

Station Info

Station List

Display information about the connected stations.

WDS Link Info

WDS Link Info

Display statistics about the NWA1000 Series’s WDS (Wireless Disctribution

System) connections.

Detected Device

Detected

Display information about suspected rogue APs.

Device

Log

View Log

Display log entries for the NWA1000 Series.

Configuration Menu

Use the configuration menu screens to configure the NWA1000 Series’s features.

Table 15 Configuration Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK

TAB

FUNCTION

Network

IP Setting

Configure the IP address for the NWA1000 Series Ethernet interface.

VLAN

Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.

NCC Discovery

Configures proxy server settings to access the NCC.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

41

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Table 15 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)

FOLDER OR LINK

TAB

FUNCTION

Wireless

AP

WLAN Setting

Manage the NWA1000 Series’s general wireless settings.

Management

Rogue AP

Rogue/Friendly AP

Configure how the NWA1000 Series monitors for rogue APs.

List

Load Balancing

Load Balancing

Configure load balancing for traffic moving to and from wireless

clients.

DCS

DCS

Configure dynamic wireless channel selection.

Object

User

User

Create and manage users.

Setting

Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions,

and rules to force user authentication.

AP Profile

Radio

Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be

associated with different APs.

SSID

Create and manage wireless SSID, security, MAC filtering, and layer-2

isolation files that can be associated with different APs.

WDS Profile

WDS

Create and manage WDS profiles that can be used to connect to

different APs in WDS.

Certificate

My Certificates

Create and manage th e NWA1000 Series’s certificates.

Trusted Certificates

Import and manage certificates from trusted sources.

System

Host Name

Host Name

Configure the system and domain name for the NWA1000 Series.

Date/Time

Date/Time

Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the NWA1000

Series.

WWW

Service Control

Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication.

SSH

SSH

Configure SSH server and SSH service settings.

TELNET

TELNET

Configure telnet server settings for the NWA1000 Series.

FTP

FTP

Configure FTP server settings.

SNMP

SNMP

Configure SNMP communities and services.

Log & Report

Email Daily

Email Daily Report

Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to

Report

send.

Log Setting

Log Setting

Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers.

Maintenance Menu

Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and reboot or shut down the NWA1000 Series.

Table 16 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK

TAB

FUNCTION

File Manager

Configuration File

Manage and upload configuration files for the NWA1000 Series.

Firmware Package

View the current firmware version and to upload firmware.

Shell Script

Manage and run shell script files for the NWA1000 Series.

Diagnostics

Diagnostics

Collect diagnostic information.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

42

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Table 16 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary (continued)

FOLDER OR LINK

TAB

FUNCTION

LEDs

Suppression

Enable this feature to keep the LEDs off after the NWA1000 Series

starts.

Locator

Enable this feature to see the actual location of the NWA1000 Series

between several devices in the network.

Antenna

Antenna Switch

Change antenna orientation for the radios.

Reboot

Reboot

Restart the NWA1000 Series.

Shutdown

Shutdown

Turn off the NWA1000 Series.

5.3.3 Warning Messages

Warning messages, such as those resulting from misconfiguration, display in a pop up window.

Figure 20 Warning Message

5.3.4 Tables and Lists

The Web Configurator tables and lists are quite flexible and provide several options for how to display their entries.

5.3.4.1 Manipulating Table Display

Here are some of the ways you can manipulate the Web Configurator tables.

1 Click a column heading to sort the table’s entries according to that column’s criteria.

2Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what you can do:

Sort in ascending alphabetical order

Sort in descending (reverse) alphabetical order

Select which columns to display

Group entries by field

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

43

Zyxel NWA1123-AC PRO, NWA1302-AC, NWA1123-AC HD, NWA1123-ACV2 User Manual

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

Show entries in groups

Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text.

3 Select a column heading cell’s right border and drag to re-size the column.

4Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark displays next to the column’s title when you drag the column to a valid new location.

5Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control how many entries display at a time.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

44

Chapter 5 The Web Configurator

5.3.4.2 Working with Table Entries

The tables have icons for working with table entries. A sample is shown next. You can often use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate.

Table 17 Common Table Icons

Here are descriptions for the most common table icons.

Table 18 Common Table Icons

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Add

Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered list is

important (features where the NWA1000 Series applies the table’s entries in order like the

firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the

selected entry.

Edit

Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

Remove

To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to

remove it before doing so.

Activate

To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate

To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

Object Reference

Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use

the entry.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

45

CHAPTER 6

Setup Wizard

6.1 Accessing the Wizard

When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the NWA1000 Series to its default configuration, the wizard screen displays.

Note: If you have already configured the wizard screens and want to open it again, click the Wizard icon on the upper right corner of any Web Configurator screen.

6.2 Using the Wizard

This wizard helps you configure the NWA1000 Series IP address, change time zone, daylight saving and radio settings, and edit an SSID profile to change general wireless and wireless security settings.

6.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings

Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s country code, time zone and daylight saving time.

Country Code: Select the country where the NWA1000 Series is located.

Note: The country code field is not available and you cannot change the country code if the NWA1000 Series products comply with the U.S. laws, policies and regulations and are to be sold to the U.S. market.

Time Zone: Select the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Enable Daylight Saving: Select the option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends.

Offset allows you to specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends. Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).

Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

46

Chapter 6 Setup Wizard

Figure 21 Wizard: Time Zone

6.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection

Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s system password and IP address.

Change Password: Enter a new password and retype it to confirm.

Uplink Connection: Select Auto (DHCP) if the NWA1000 Series is connected to a router with the DHCP server enabled. You then need to check the router for the IP address assigned to the NWA1000 Series in order to access the NWA1000 Series’s web configurator again.

Otherwise, select Static IP when the NWA1000 Series is NOT connected to a router or you want to assign it a fixed IP address. You will need to manually enter:

the NWA1000 Series’s IP address and subnet mask.

the IP address of the router that helps forward traffic.

a DNS server’s IP address. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.

Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

47

Chapter 6 Setup Wizard

Figure 22 Wizard: Uplink

6.2.3 Step 3 Radio

Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s radio transmitter(s).

Channel Width: Select the wireless channel bandwidth you want the NWA1000 Series to use. Because not all devices support 40 MHz and/or 80 MHz channels, select 20/40/80MHz to allow the NWA1000 Series to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically.

Channel Selection: Select Auto to have the NWA1000 Series automatically choose a radio channel that has least interference. Otherwise, select Manual and specify a channel the NWA1000 Series will use in the 2.4GHz or 5GHz wireless LAN. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in.

Maximum Output Power: Enter the maximum output power of the NWA1000 Series. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA1000 Series to reduce interference with other APs.

Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA1000 Series’s effective broadcast radius.

Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

48

Chapter 6 Setup Wizard

Figure 23 Wizard: Radio

6.2.4 Step 4 SSID

Use this screen to enable, disable or edit an SSID profile.

Select an SSID profile and click the Status switch to turn it on or off. To change an SSID profile’s settings, such as the SSID (WiFi network name) and WiFi password, double-click the SSID profile entry from the list. See Section 6.2.4.1 on page 49 for more information.

Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard.

Figure 24 Wizard: SSID

6.2.4.1 Edit SSID Profile

Use this screen to configure an SSID profile.

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

49

Chapter 6 Setup Wizard

The screen varies depending on the security type you selected.

SSID — Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters for the wireless LAN.

Status — Select Activate to enable the SSID profile. Otherwise, select Inactive to disable the profile.

VLAN ID: Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA1000 Series to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.

Band Mode: Select the wireless band which this profile should use. 2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. 5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients.

Not all NWA1000 Seriess support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.

Security Type: Select WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. Otherwise, select OPEN to allow any wireless client to associate this network without authentication.

PSK (Pre-shared Key): If you set Security Type to WPA2 and select PSK, enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.

802.1x: Select 802.1x and the Primary / Secondary RADIUS Server check box to have the NWA1000 Series use the specified RADIUS server. You have to enter the IP address, port number and shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.

Click OK to proceed. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving.

Figure 25 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-PSK)

NWA1000 Series User’s Guide

50

Loading…

Default Login Details

User’s Guide

NWA/WAC/WAX Series

802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/ax Access Point

Copyright © 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation

LAN IP Address DHCP-assigned IP

OR

192.168.1.2

User Name admin

Password 1234

Version 6.00 Edition 1, 12/2019

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

2

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots

and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product

hardware, firmware, or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the

information in this manual is accurate.

Some screens or options in this book may not be available for your product (see the product feature

tables in Section 1.4 on page 19).

Related Documentation

•Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Zyxel Device and access the Web Configurator.

•CLI Reference Guide

The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and CLI commands

to configure the Zyxel Device.

Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Zyxel Device.

Web Configurator Online Help

Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information.

Nebula Control Center User’s Guide

This User’s Guide shows how to manage the Zyxel Device remotely. The features of these devices can

be managed through Nebula Control Center. It also offers features that are not available when the

Zyxel Device is in standalone mode (see Section 2.1.2 on page 24).

NXC Series User’s Guide

See this User’s Guide for instructions on using the NXC as an AP Controller (AC) for the Zyxel Device.

This is used when the Zyxel Device is set to be managed by a Zyxel AC.

•More Information

Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Zyxel Device.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

3

Document Conventions

Warnings and Notes

These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide.

Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.

Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to

configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.

Syntax Conventions

All models in this series may be referred to as the “Zyxel Device” in this guide.

Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.

A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration >

Network > IP Setting means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the Network sub

menu and finally the IP Setting tab to get to that screen.

Icons Used in Figures

Figures in this guide may use the following generic icons. The Zyxel Device icon is not an exact

representation of your device.

Zyxel Device Router Switch Internet

Server Desktop Laptop AP Controller

Printer Nebula Switch Nebula Gateway Smart T.V.

IP Phone

Contents Overview

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

4

Contents Overview

Introduction ……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..……….……………………. 13

AP Management ………………………………………………………….……………………………..………..…………….. 24

Hardware ……………………………………………..…………………………….………………………….……………………. 33

The Web Configurator ……………………………………..……………………………..…………………………………… 53

Standalone Configuration …….…………………………………………………………………………………..….……64

Standalone Configuration ………………………….……………………………..……………………………...…………. 65

Dashboard ………………….……………………….…………………………….……………………………………………….. 67

Setup Wizard ………………………………………………………….……………………….……………….………………….. 73

Monitor …………………………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………………. 79

Network …………………………………………………….……………………….……………………………………………….. 94

Wireless ………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………..……………………… 105

Bluetooth …………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………….…………………… 120

User ……………………………..…………………………….……………………….…………………….……………………….. 123

AP Profile ………………………………………………………….……………………………..…………………………………. 130

MON Profile ……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………..…………………. 150

WDS Profile …………….……………………………..…………………………….……………………………………………… 153

Certificates ………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………………..…………………… 155

System …………….……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 171

Log and Report ………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………. 194

File Manager ………………………………………..…………………………….………………………………………….….. 206

Diagnostics ………………………..…………………………….……………………………..……………..………………….. 217

LEDs …………………………….…………………………….……………………………..……………….………………………. 219

Antenna Switch ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………………………… 222

Reboot ………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………….……………………. 224

Shutdown ……………………………………………..…………………………….………………………….………………….. 225

Local Configuration in Cloud Mode ………….……………………………………………….……………………..226

Cloud Mode …………………………….…………………………….……………………………..………….……………….. 227

Dashboard ……..……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…..………………… 229

Network …………………………………………………….……………………….……………………………………………… 231

Maintenance …………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………..………………. 234

Appendices and Troubleshooting …………….……………………………………………………………………...239

Troubleshooting ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………..………………. 240

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

5

Table of Contents

Document Conventions …. ….………….. …. …. ….…………………………… …. …. …. ….………….. .………..3

Contents Overview …………..……………………………….……………………………………………….…………….4

Table of Contents…………………………………………………………………………….…………………………………..5

Chapter 1

Introduction .…………………………………………….……………………………………………………..…………………13

1.1 Overview …………………………………………………..……………………………..…………………………………… 13

1.2 Zyxel Device Roles ………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………… 13

1.2.1 Root AP ………….…………………………….……………………………..………………………….………..……. 14

1.2.2 Wireless Repeater ……………………………….……………………………..……………………….……….. 14

1.2.3 Radio Frequency (RF) Monitor …………….……………………………..……………………………..…….15

1.3 Sample Feature Applications ……………………………………………………..…………………………………… 17

1.3.1 MBSSID …………..…………………………….……………………………..………………………….……………… 17

1.3.2 Dual-Radio …………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………… 18

1.4 Zyxel Device Product Feature Comparison ………………………….……………………………..………….. 19

Chapter 2

AP Management….…………………………………………….……………………………………………….…………..24

2.1 Management Mode ………………………………………………………………………..…………………………….. 24

2.1.1 Standalone ………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………….. 24

2.1.2 Nebula Control Center ………………………………………………..……………………………..……..…… 24

2.1.3 AP Controller (AC) ………………………………………………..……………………………..………..………. 26

2.2 Switching Management Modes ………………………..……………………………..………………………….. 26

2.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility …………………..……………………………..…………………………………… 27

2.3.1 Requirements ……………..…………………………….……………………………..………………….…………. 27

2.3.2 Run the ZON Utility …………………………………….……………………………..…………………………….. 28

2.4 Ways to Access the Zyxel Device ………….…………………………………………………………………...…… 31

2.5 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device ……………………………..……………………………..……. 32

Chapter 3

Hardware.……………….……………………………….……………………………………………………..…………………33

3.1 Grounding (WAC6552D-S and WAC6553D-E) ………………………………………………..………………… 33

3.2 Zyxel Device Models With Single LEDs …………………………………..……………………………..……….…. 34

3.2.1 NWA1123-ACv2 …………………………………………………………..……………………………..………….. 34

3.2.2 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD ………………..……………………………..………………………. 36

3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD ………………………………..……………………………..…………………………….…….. 37

3.2.4 NWA5123-AC ……………………………….……………………………..……………………………..……….. 39

3.2.5 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S ….……………………………..……………………………..……. 40

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

6

3.3 Zyxel Device Models With Multiple LEDs …………………..……………………………..…………………….... 42

3.3.1 NWA1123-AC PRO …………………………………………………………………..………………………..…… 42

3.3.2 NWA1302-AC ……………………………….……………………………..……………………………..………….. 44

3.3.3 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S …………………………………………..………….. 46

3.3.4 WAC6103D-I …..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………..………….. 48

3.3.5 WAC5302D-S ………………………………..……………………………..……………………………..………….. 50

Chapter 4

The Web Configurator…………………………………………………………….……………………………….………….53

4.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………..…………………………………… 53

4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ………….……………………………..……………………………..………….. 53

4.3 Navigating the Web Configurator …….…………………………..……………………………..……………..…. 55

4.3.1 Title Bar …………………………….…………………………….……………………….…………………………….. 56

4.3.2 Navigation Panel ………………………………………………….……………………………..………..………. 58

4.3.3 Standalone Mode Navigation Panel Menus ………………..……………………………..………….. 58

4.3.4 Cloud Mode Navigation Panel Menus …………………..……………………………..………………… 60

4.3.5 Tables and Lists …………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………….. 61

Part I: Standalone Configuration………..………………………………….…………….64

Chapter 5

Standalone Configuration……..…………………………………………………………………………………..….……65

5.1 Overview …………………………………………………..……………………………..…………………………………… 65

5.2 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device ………………………………………………………………………….. 65

Chapter 6

Dashboard…………………………………………….……………………………………………….……..………………..67

6.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………..…………………………………… 67

6.1.1 CPU Usage ……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…….………….. 70

6.1.2 Memory Usage ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..………..………. 71

Chapter 7

Setup Wizard….……………………………….……………………………………………….……………….………………..73

7.1 Accessing the Wizard …………………………………………………………..…………………………….…………… 73

7.2 Using the Wizard ……………………………………………………..……………………………..………………………. 73

7.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings ……………………..……………………….……………………………..………..………. 73

7.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection ……………….……………………………..………………… 74

7.2.3 Step 3 Radio ………………………….…………………………….……………………………..…….………….. 75

7.2.4 Step 4 SSID ……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..….…………….. 76

7.2.5 Summary ..……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………… 78

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

7

Chapter 8

Monitor…………….…………………………….……………………………………………….………………………………...79

8.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………..…………………………………… 79

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ….…………………………………..……………………………..……. 79

8.2 What You Need to Know …………………………….……………………………..…………………………..………. 79

8.3 Network Status ……….…………………………….……………………………..………………………..……………….. 80

8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph ………………………………….……………………………..…………………………….. 81

8.4 Radio List …..……………………………..…………………………….……………………………....…………………….. 82

8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information ………………………………….……………………………..………………...84

8.5 Station List ……………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………………. 86

8.6 WDS Link Info ………………..……………………………………………………..…………………………………………. 87

8.7 Detected Device ……………….……………………………………………………..…………………….…………….. 88

8.8 View Log …………………………….…………………………….……………………………..………..…………………… 91

Chapter 9

Network.…………………………………………………………….………………………………………….…………………..94

9.1 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………..…………………………………… 94

9.1.1 AP Controller Management ………………………………………..……………………………..………….. 94

9.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ….…………………………………..……………………………..……. 96

9.2 IP Setting ………………………………………………………….……………………….…………….…………………….. 97

9.3 VLAN ………………………………….…………………………….……………………….…………………………………… 98

9.4 Storm Control ……………………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 101

9.5 AC (AP Controller) Discovery ……………………………………………………..…………………………..…….. 102

9.6 NCC Discovery ………………………………………………….……………………………..…………….…………….. 103

Chapter 10

Wireless …………………………….…………………………………………………………….……………………………….105

10.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 105

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 105

10.1.2 What You Need to Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 106

10.2 AP Management …………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………..………… 106

10.3 Rogue AP ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..………….……………….. 109

10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List ………………………….……………………………..……………………..113

10.4 Load Balancing ……………………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 114

10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections ……………………………..…………………………… 115

10.5 DCS …………………………………………………………………………………..……………………………………….. 116

10.6 Technical Reference ……………….…………………………….……………………………..…………..………… 117

Chapter 11

Bluetooth………………………………………………….……………………………………………….…..…………………120

11.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 120

11.1.1 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 120

11.2 Bluetooth Advertising Settings ….……..……………………..……………………………..…………………….. 121

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

8

11.2.1 Edit Advertising Settings …………………………………………………..…………………………….…… 121

Chapter 12

User….…………………………………………….……………………………………………….……………………………….123

12.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 123

12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 123

12.1.2 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 123

12.2 User Summary ………………………………..…………………………….……………………….…………………….. 124

12.2.1 Add/Edit User ……………………………..……………………………..……………………………...……….. 124

12.3 Setting ………………………………………….…………………………….………………………...…………………… 126

12.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings ……………………………….…………………………… 128

Chapter 13

AP Profile…………………………………….……………………………….……………………………….………………….130

13.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 130

13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 130

13.1.2 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 130

13.2 Radio ………………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………… 131

13.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile …….…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 132

13.3 SSID ………………………………………..…………………………….………………………………………………..….. 137

13.3.1 SSID List …………………………………………………..……………………………..…………….…………….. 137

13.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile ……………………………………………………..…………………………………. 139

13.4 Security List ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..………..…………………. 141

13.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile ……………………………………………………………….…………………….. 142

13.5 MAC Filter List ………………………………………………….……………………………..………….……………….. 146

13.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile ………………..……………………………..…………………………….... 146

13.6 Layer-2 Isolation List …….…………………………….……………………………..…………………..…………….. 147

13.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile ..…….……………………………..……………………………..….. 149

Chapter 14

MON Profile……………..……………………………….……………………………………………………..……………….150

14.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 150

14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 150

14.2 MON Profile …………………………………………………….……………………………..…………..………………. 150

14.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile ……………………….……………………………..……………………………...…. 151

Chapter 15

WDS Profile……….……………….……………………………….…………………………………………..………………..153

15.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 153

15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 153

15.2 WDS Profile ……..……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………. 153

15.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile ………………….……………………………..……………………………..…….….. 154

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

9

Chapter 16

Certificates ……………………….…………………………………………………………….……………..………………..155

16.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 155

16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 155

16.1.2 What You Need to Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 155

16.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ………………………………………………………………………..………….…… 157

16.2 My Certificates ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..……..……………… 158

16.2.1 Add My Certificates …………………………………………….……………………………..………….…… 159

16.2.2 Edit My Certificates ……………….…………………………….……………………………..………..…….. 161

16.2.3 Import Certificates ……………….…………………………….……………………………..………..…….. 164

16.3 Trusted Certificates ……..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………. 165

16.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates …..…………………………….……………………………..………………..…… 166

16.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates ………………..……………………………..…………………………….... 169

16.4 Technical Reference ……………….…………………………….……………………………..…………..………… 170

Chapter 17

System…………………….…………………………………………………………….……………………..………………….171

17.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 171

17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 171

17.2 Host Name ………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………………………………. 171

17.3 Power Mode ………………………………………………………….……………………….…………….…………….. 172

17.4 Date and Time ……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..……………. 173

17.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List ……………………………..……………………………..………… 175

17.4.2 Time Server Synchronization ……………..……………………………..……………………………..….. 175

17.5 WWW Overview ………..……………………………………………………………..…………………………………. 176

17.5.1 Service Access Limitations ………….……………………………..……………………….………………. 176

17.5.2 System Timeout …..…………………………….……………………….……………………………..……… 176

17.5.3 HTTPS ……..……………………………..…………………………….……………………………....…………….. 177

17.5.4 Configuring WWW Service Control …….……………………………………………..………………… 177

17.5.5 HTTPS Example …………………………………………………….……………………………..……….……… 178

17.6 SSH ……………………………………………………………….……………………………..…………………………… 184

17.6.1 How SSH Works ……………………..…………………………….……………………………..………..…….. 185

17.6.2 SSH Implementation on the Zyxel Device …………………..……………………………..………… 186

17.6.3 Requirements for Using SSH ……………………..……………………………..…………………………...186

17.6.4 Configuring SSH ….…………………………….……………………………..………………………….……… 186

17.6.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH ……………..……………………………..…………………….. 187

17.7 Telnet …………………..…………………………….……………………….………………………..……………………. 188

17.8 FTP ……………………………..……………………………………………………..……………………………………….. 189

17.9 SNMP ……………………………………..…………………………….……………………….……….………………….. 190

17.9.1 Supported MIBs …………………….…………………………….……………………………..………..…….. 191

17.9.2 SNMP Traps …..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………..………… 191

17.9.3 Configuring SNMP …………………………….……………………………..…………………………….…… 191

17.9.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile ..……………………………..…………………………… 192

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

10

Chapter 18

Log and Report………….. …. …. …. …………… …. …. ….………….. …. …. ….…………… …. …………….194

18.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 194

18.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter ..……………………..……………………………..………………. 194

18.2 Email Daily Report ……………………………….……………………………..………………………….……………. 194

18.3 Log Setting …………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 196

18.3.1 Log Setting Screen ………….…………………………….……………………………..……………….……. 197

18.3.2 Edit System Log Settings …………………………….……………………………..………………….…. 198

18.3.3 Edit Remote Server …………………………..……………………………..……………………………..….. 202

18.3.4 Active Log Summary .…………………………….……………………………..………………………… 203

Chapter 19

File Manager …………..……………………………….……………………………………………….……………………..206

19.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 206

19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 206

19.1.2 What you Need to Know ……………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 206

19.2 Configuration File …………………………………………………………………………..……………..……………. 207

19.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP ………………………………………….….. 211

19.3 Firmware Package …………………………….……………………….……………………………..…….………… 212

19.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP ………………..……………………………..………………. 213

19.4 Shell Script ………………….……………………………………………………..……………………………………….. 214

Chapter 20

Diagnostics…………………………………….……………………………………………….…………………………….217

20.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 217

20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 217

20.2 Diagnostics …….……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..………………. 217

Chapter 21

LEDs …………..…………………………………………….…………………………………………………………….………..219

21.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 219

21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 219

21.2 Suppression Screen ………………………………………..……………………………..…………………………… 219

21.3 Locator Screen …………………………………………………….……………………………..……….……………. 220

Chapter 22

Antenna Switch………….…………………………………………………………….……………………………….……..222

22.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 222

22.1.1 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 222

22.2 Antenna Switch Screen …………………………………..……………………………..…………………………… 222

Chapter 23

Reboot…………..……………………………….…………………………………………………………….…………..……..224

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

11

23.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 224

23.1.1 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 224

23.2 Reboot …….……………………………..…………………………….……………………………..….…………………. 224

Chapter 24

Shutdown……………………………………….……………………………………………….…………………………….225

24.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 225

24.1.1 What You Need To Know ..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 225

24.2 Shutdown ………………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 225

Part II: Local Configuration in Cloud Mode…………..………………..…………..226

Chapter 25

Cloud Mode ……………………………….…………………………………………………………….……….…………….227

25.1 Overview …………….…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 227

25.2 Cloud Mode Web Configurator Screens ………………..……………………………..…………………….. 227

Chapter 26

Dashboard…………………………………………….……………………………………………….……..………………229

Chapter 27

Network.…………………………………………………………….………………………………………….…………………231

27.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 231

27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 231

27.2 IP Setting ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 231

27.3 VLAN ………………………………..…………………………….……………………….…………………………………. 233

Chapter 28

Maintenance……………..…………………………………………………………….………………………..…………….234

28.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 234

28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter …..……………………………..……………………….………… 234

28.2 Shell Script ………………….……………………………………………………..……………………………………….. 234

28.3 Diagnostics …………………………………..…………………………….…………………………….……………….. 235

28.4 View Log …………………………..…………………………….……………………………..…………………………… 236

Part III: Appendices and Troubleshooting…………………………………………..239

Chapter 29

Troubleshooting..……………….……………………………….…………………………………………………………….240

29.1 Overview ……………..…………………………….……………………………..……………………………………….. 240

Table of Contents

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

12

29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED …………………………………………………………..………… 240

29.3 Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login ………………….……………………………..………… 241

29.4 Internet Access ……………………….…………………………….……………………………..…………………….. 245

29.5 WiFi Network ……………………………………….……………………………..……………………….………………. 246

29.6 Resetting the Zyxel Device …………………………………….……………………………..……………..……… 247

29.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help ……………………………..……………………………..……………….248

Appendix A Importing Certificates …………….………………………………………………………………….... 249

Appendix B IPv6…………….…………………………………………………………………….…………….……………. 273

Appendix C Customer Support ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 281

Appendix D Legal Information …………….…………………………………………………………………….. 287

Index …………….…………..……………….……………………………….………………………………………………..300

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

13

CHAPTER 1

Introduction

1.1 Overview

This User’s Guide covers the models listed in the following table. They can be managed in one of the

following methods: remote management through Nebula Control Center (NCC) or an AP Controller

(AC) such as the NXC, or local management in Standalone Mode. Each Zyxel Device runs in standalone

mode by default, but it is recommended to use NCC management if it is available for your device.

For more information about Access Point (AP) management, see Section 2.1 on page 24.

Use the Zyxel Device to set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax compatible

devices in either 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks or both at the same time.

When two or more APs are interconnected, this network is called a Wireless Distribution System (WDS).

See Section 1.2.2 on page 14 for more information on root and repeater APs and how to set them up.

1.2 Zyxel Device Roles

This section describes some of the different roles that your Zyxel Device can take up within a network.

Not all roles are supported by all models (see Section 1.4 on page 19). The Zyxel Device can serve as a:

Access Point (AP) — This is used to allow wireless clients to connect to the Internet.

Radio Frequency (RF) monitor — An RF monitor searches for rogue APs to help eliminate network

threats if it supports monitor mode and rogue APs detection/containment. An RF monitor cannot

simultaneously act as an AP.

Root AP — A root AP connects to the gateway or switch through a wired Ethernet connection and

has wireless repeaters connected to it to extend its range.

NCC, AC or Standalone

(NebulaFlex PRO) NCC or Standalone

(NebulaFlex) AC or Standalone

NWA5123-AC HD NWA1123-ACv2 NWA5123-AC

WAC6103D-I NWA1123-AC PRO WAC5302D-S

WAC6303D-S NWA1123-AC HD

WAC6502D-E NWA1302-AC

WAC6502D-S NWA110AX

WAC6503D-S

WAC6552D-S

WAC6553D-E

WAX510D

WAX650S

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

14

Wireless repeater — A wireless repeater wirelessly connects to a root AP and extends the network’s

wireless range.

The following figure shows a network setup that uses these different roles to create a secure Wireless

Distribution System (WDS). The root AP (Y) is connected to a network with Internet access and has a

wireless repeater (X) connected to it to expand the wireless network’s range. Clients (A, B, and C) can

access the wired network through the wireless repeater and/or root AP.

If a client (D) tries to set up his own AP (R) with weak security settings, the network becomes exposed to

threats. The RF monitor (M) scans the area to detect all APs, which can help the network administrator

discover these rogue APs and remove them or use the NXC to quarantine them.

Figure 1 Sample Network Setup

1.2.1 Root AP

In Root AP mode, you can have multiple SSIDs active for regular wireless connections and one SSID for

the connection with a repeater (repeater SSID). Wireless clients can use either SSID to associate with the

Zyxel Device in Root AP mode. A repeater must use the repeater SSID to connect to the Zyxel Device in

Root AP mode.

When the Zyxel Device is in Root AP mode, repeater security between the Zyxel Device and other

repeaters is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When

repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section

10.2 on page 106 and Section 15.2 on page 153 for more details.

Unless specified, the term “security settings” refers to the traffic between the wireless clients and the AP.

At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the Zyxel Device only.

1.2.2 Wireless Repeater

Using Repeater mode, your Zyxel Device can extend the range of the WLAN. In the figure below, the

Zyxel Device in Repeater mode (Z) has a wireless connection to the Zyxel Device in Root AP mode (X)

which is connected to a wired network and also has a wireless connection to another Zyxel Device in

Repeater mode (Y) at the same time. Z and Y act as repeaters that forward traffic between associated

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

15

wireless clients and the wired LAN. Clients A and B access the AP and the wired network behind the AP

through repeaters Z and Y.

Figure 2 Repeater Application

When the Zyxel Device is in Repeater mode, repeater security between the Zyxel Device and other

repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When

repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section

10.2 on page 106 and Section 15.2 on page 153 for more details.

For NCC managed devices, you only need to enable AP Smart Mesh to automatically create wireless

links between APs. See the NCC User’s Guide for more details.

To set up a WDS in standalone mode APs, do the following steps. You should already have the root AP

set up (see the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections).

1Go to Configuration > Object > WDS Profile in your root AP web configurator and click Add.

2Enter a profile name, an SSID for the WDS, and a pre-shared key.

3Do steps 1 and 2 for the wireless repeater using the same SSID and pre-shared key.

4Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between the root and

repeater Zyxel Devices is made.

To set up a WDS in NXC managed Zyxel Devices, see the NXC User’s Guide.

1.2.3 Radio Frequency (RF) Monitor

The Zyxel Device can be set to work as an RF monitor to discover nearby Access Points. The information

it obtains from other APs is used to tag possible rogue APs and quarantine them if the Zyxel Device is

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

16

managed by the NXC (see Section 2.1.3 on page 26). If the Zyxel Device’s radio setting is set to MON

Mode (RF Monitor mode), it will serve as a dedicated RF monitor and its AP clients are disconnected.

The models that do not support MON Mode support Rogue AP Detection (see Section 10.3 on page 109).

Rogue AP Detection allows the AP to scan all channels similar to MON Mode except that the Zyxel

Device still works as an AP while it scans the environment for wireless signals. To see which Zyxel Devices

support the RF Monitor feature, see Section 1.4 on page 19.

The Zyxel Device in MON Mode scans a range of WiFi channels that you specify in a MON Profile, either in

the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz band. To scan both bands, you need to set both radio 1 and radio 2 in MON Mode.

Once a rogue AP is detected, the network administrator can manually change the network settings to

limit its access to the network using its MAC address or have the device physically removed. If the Zyxel

Device is managed by an NXC, the network administrator can also use Rogue AP Containment through

the NXC.

MON Mode in Standalone Mode

To use an RF monitor in standalone mode, do the following steps:

1Create a MON Profile in Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add. Specify a Channel dwell time to

determine how long the RF monitor scans a specific channel before moving to the next one.

2To scan all 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz channels, select auto in Scan Channel Mode. Make sure that the Activate

check box is selected and click OK.

3Go to the Configuration > Wireless > AP Management screen and set Radio 1 OP Mode (2.4 GHz) and/or

Radio 2 OP Mode (5 GHz) to MON Mode.

4Select the Radio 1(2) Profile that you created in the previous step. Make sure that the Radio 1(2)

Activate check box is selected and click Apply.

5Go to Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device to see a list of APs scanned by the RF monitor.

6Select an AP or APs in the list and click Mark as Rogue AP or Mark as Friendly AP.

MON Mode in NXC-Managed Zyxel Devices

For NXC-managed Zyxel Devices, do the following steps in the NXC web configurator:

1Create a MON Profile in CONFIGURATION > Objec t > MON Profile > Add. Specify a Channel dwell time to

determine how long the RF monitor scans a specific channel before moving to the next one.

2To scan all 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz channels, select auto in Scan Channel Mode. Make sure that the Activate

check box is selected and click OK.

3Go to the CONFIGURATION > Wireless > AP Management > Mgmt. AP List > Edit screen and/or set Radio

1 OP Mode (2.4 GHz) and Radio 2 OP Mode (5 GHz) to MON Mode.

4Select the Radio 1(2) Profile that you created in the previous step. Select Override Group Radio Setting

and click OK.

5Go to MONITOR > Wireless > Detected Device to see a list of APs scanned by the RF monitor.

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

17

6Select an AP or APs in the list and click Mark as Rogue AP or Mark as Friendly AP.

7To quarantine a rogue AP, go to CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Rogue AP, select the APs you want to

quarantine, and click Containment. Make sure the Enable Rogue AP Containment check box is

selected, and click Apply.

1.3 Sample Feature Applications

This section describes some possible scenarios and topologies that you can set up using your Zyxel

Device.

1.3.1 MBSSID

A Basic Service Set (BSS) is the set of devices forming a single wireless network (usually an access point

and one or more wireless clients). The Service Set IDentifier (SSID) is the name of a BSS. In Multiple BSS

(MBSSID) mode, the Zyxel Device provides multiple virtual APs, each forming its own BSS and using its

own individual SSID profile.

You can configure multiple SSID profiles, and have all of them active at any one time.

You can assign different wireless and security settings to each SSID profile. This allows you to

compartmentalize groups of users, set varying access privileges, and prioritize network traffic to and

from certain BSSs.

To the wireless clients in the network, each SSID appears to be a different access point. As in any wireless

network, clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings.

For example, you might want to set up a wireless network in your office where Internet telephony (VoIP)

users have priority. You also want a regular wireless network for standard users, as well as a ‘guest’

wireless network for visitors. In the following figure, VoIP_SSID users have QoS priority, SSID01 is the wireless

network for standard users, and Guest_SSID is the wireless network for guest users. In this example, the

guest user is forbidden access to the wired Land Area Network (LAN) behind the AP and can access

only the Internet.

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

18

Figure 3 Multiple BSSs

1.3.2 Dual-Radio

Some of the Zyxel Device models are equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can configure

two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously.

Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the

effects of radio interference.

You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz

band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming.

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

19

Figure 4 Dual-Radio Application

1.4 Zyxel Device Product Feature Comparison

The following tables show the differences between each Zyxel Device model.

Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES NWA1123-

ACV2NWA1123-

AC PRO NWA1123-

AC HD NWA110A

XNWA1302-

AC NWA5123-

AC NWA5123-

AC HD WAC5302

D-S

Supported

Wireless

Standards

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE

802.11ax

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

Supported

Frequency

Bands

2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz

Available

Security

Modes None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

Enhanced-

open

WPA3-

enterprise

WPA3-

personal

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

Number of

SSID Profiles 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

Number of

Wireless Radios 22222222

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

20

Monitor Mode

& Rogue APs

ContainmentANo No No No No Yes No No

Rogue AP

Detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

WDS (Wireless

Distribution

System) — Root

AP & Repeater

Modes

Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Tunnel

Forwarding

Mode

No No No No No No No No

Layer-2

Isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supported PoE

Standards

IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at

Power

Detection No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

External

Antennas No No No No No No No No

Internal

Antennas Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Antenna

Switch No

Yes

(per radio +

physical

switch)

No No No No No No

Console Port 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial

LED Locator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

LED

Suppression Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

AC (AP

Controller)

Discovery

No No No No No Yes Yes Yes

NebulaFlex

PRO No No No No No No Yes No

NCC

Discovery Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

802.11r Fast

Roaming

Support

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

802.11k/v

Assisted

Roaming

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Bluetooth Low

Energy (BLE) No No No No No No No Yes

USB Port for BLENoNoNoNoNoNoNoYes

Ethernet Storm

Control No No Yes Yes No No Yes No

Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES NWA1123-

ACV2NWA1123-

AC PRO NWA1123-

AC HD NWA110A

XNWA1302-

AC NWA5123-

AC NWA5123-

AC HD WAC5302

D-S

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

21

GroundingNoNoYesYesNoNoYesNo

Maximum

number of log

messages

512 event logs and 1024 debug logs 256 event

logs and 1

debug logs

A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC User’s Guide for details.

Table 2 WAC 6000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES WAC6103D

-I WAC6303D

-S WAC6502D

-E WAC6502D

-S WAC6503D

-S WAC6552D

-S WAC6553D

-E

Supported Wireless

Standards

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE

802.11ac

Supported Frequency

Bands

2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz

Available Security

Modes

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-

MIX

Number of SSID Profiles 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

Number of Wireless

Radios 2222222

Monitor Mode & Rogue

APs ContainmentAYes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Rogue AP Detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

WDS (Wireless

Distribution System) —

Root AP & Repeater

Modes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Tunnel Forwarding

Mode Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Layer-2 Isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supported PoE

Standards

IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at

Power Detection No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

External Antennas No No Yes No No No Yes

Internal Antennas Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No

Antenna Switch Yes

(per radio +

physical

switch)

No No No No No No

Console Port 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial

LED Locator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

LED Suppression Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

AC (AP Controller)

Discovery Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES NWA1123-

ACV2NWA1123-

AC PRO NWA1123-

AC HD NWA110A

XNWA1302-

AC NWA5123-

AC NWA5123-

AC HD WAC5302

D-S

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

22

NebulaFlex PRO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NCC Discovery Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

802.11r Fast Roaming

Support Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

802.11k/v Assisted

Roaming Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Bluetooth Low Energy

(BLE) NoYesNoNoNoNoNo

USB Port for BLE NoNoNoNoNoNoNo

Ethernet Storm Control No Yes No No No No No

Grounding No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Maximum number of log

messages 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs

A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC User’s Guide for details.

Table 2 WAC 6000 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES WAC6103D

-I WAC6303D

-S WAC6502D

-E WAC6502D

-S WAC6503D

-S WAC6552D

-S WAC6553D

-E

Table 3 WAX 500/600 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES WAX510D WAX650S

Supported Wireless

Standards

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11ax

IEEE 802.11a

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11n

IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11ax

Supported Frequency

Bands

2.4 GHz

5 GHz 2.4 GHz

5 GHz

Available Security Modes None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-MIX

Enhanced-open

WPA3-enterprise

WPA3-personal

None

WEP

WPA2

WPA2-MIX

WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK-MIX

Enhanced-open

WPA3-enterprise

WPA3-personal

Number of SSID Profiles 64 64

Number of Wireless Radios 2 2

Monitor Mode & Rogue APs

ContainmentANo No

Rogue AP Detection Yes Yes

WDS (Wireless Distribution

System) — Root AP &

Repeater Modes

No No

Tunnel Forwarding Mode Yes Yes

Layer-2 Isolation Yes Yes

Supported PoE Standards

IEEE 802.3af

IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3at

IEEE 802.3bt

Power Detection Yes Yes

External Antennas No No

Internal Antennas Yes Yes

Chapter 1 Introduction

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

23

Antenna Switch Yes

(per AP) No

Console Port 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial

LED Locator Yes Yes

LED Suppression Yes Yes

AC (AP Controller)

Discovery Yes Yes

NebulaFlex PRO Yes Yes

NCC Discovery Yes Yes

802.11r Fast Roaming

Support Yes Yes

802.11k/v Assisted Roaming Yes Yes

Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) No Yes

USB Port for BLE No No

Ethernet Storm Control Yes Yes

Grounding Yes Yes

Maximum number of log

messages 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs

A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC User’s Guide for details.

Table 3 WAX 500/600 Series Comparison Table

FEATURES WAX510D WAX650S

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

24

CHAPTER 2

AP Management

2.1 Management Mode

The Zyxel Device is a unified AP and can be managed by the NCC or an AP controller (AC), or work as a

standalone device. We recommend you use NCC to manage multiple APs (see the NCC User’s Guide).

An AP Controller such as the NXC can only manage multiple APs in the same location.

Note: Not all models can be managed by NCC or an AC. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to

check whether your product supports these.

The following table shows the default IP addresses and firmware upload methods for different

management modes.

When the Zyxel Device is in standalone mode and connects to a DHCP server, it uses the IP address

assigned by the DHCP server. Otherwise, the Zyxel Device uses the default static management IP

address (192.168.1.2). You can use the NCC Discovery or AC Discovery screen to allow the Zyxel Device

to be managed by the NCC or an AC, respectively.

When the Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC or an AC, it acts as a DHCP client and obtains an IP

address from the NCC/AC. It can be configured ONLY by the NCC/AC. To change the Zyxel Device

back to standalone mode, use the Reset button to restore the default configuration. Alternatively, you

need to check the NCC/AC for the Zyxel Device’s IP address and use FTP to upload the default

configuration file at conf/system-default.conf to the Zyxel Device and reboot the device.

2.1.1 Standalone

When working in standalone mode, the Zyxel Device is configured mainly with its built-in web

configurator. You can only connect to and set up one Zyxel Device at a time in this mode.

See Chapter 5 on page 65 for detailed information about the standalone web configurator screens.

2.1.2 Nebula Control Center

In this mode, which is also called cloud mode, you can manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through

the Zyxel Nebula cloud-based network management system. This means you can manage devices

remotely without the need of connecting to each device directly. It offers many features to better

manage and monitor not just the Zyxel Device, but your network as a whole, including supported

Table 4 Zyxel Device Management Mode Comparison

MANAGEMENT MODE DEFAULT IP ADDRESS UPLOAD FIRMWARE VIA

Nebula Control Center Dynamic NCC Portal

AP Controller Dynamic AP Controller using CAPWAP

Standalone Dynamic or

Static (192.168.1.2) Built-in Web Configurator

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

25

switches and gateways. Your network can also be managed through your smartphone using the

Nebula Mobile app. See Section 25.1 on page 227 for an example NCC managed network topology.

NCC allows different levels of management. You can configure each device on its own or configure a

set of devices together as a site. You can also monitor groups of sites called organizations, as shown

below.

It graphically presents your device/network statistics and shows an overview of your network topology,

as shown in the following figure. It also sends reports, alerts, and notifications for events, such as when a

site goes offline.

Figure 5 Traffic monitoring graph from NCC

Table 5 NCC management levels

Organization

Site A Site B

Device A-1 Device A-2 Device B-1 Device B-2

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

26

See the NCC (Nebula Control Center) User’s Guide for how to configure Nebula managed devices. See

Chapter 27 on page 231 if you want to change the Zyxel Device’s VLAN setting or manually set its IP

address.

Note: Make sure your network firewall allows TCP ports 443, 4335, and 6667 as well as UDP port

123 so the device can connect to and sync with the NCC.

2.1.3 AP Controller (AC)

If the Zyxel Device supports management using an AC (see Section 9.1.1 on page 94) such as the

NXC2500 or NXC5500, and you have this AC in the same subnet, it will be managed by the controller

automatically. To set the Zyxel Device to be managed by an AC in a different subnet or change

between management modes, use the AC Discovery screen (see Section 9.5 on page 102 and Section

9.1.1 on page 94). You can use the AC to manage multiple Zyxel Devices. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94

for an example AC managed network topology.

Note: If the Zyxel Device is already registered to NCC, the controller will be unable to manage

it.

An AC uses Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP, see RFC 5415) to discover and

configure multiple managed APs.

2.2 Switching Management Modes

The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode by default, with NCC and/or AC discovery enabled.

Standalone-to-NCC

Register the Zyxel Device at the NCC website and then turn on the Zyxel Device. Make sure that NCC

Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.6 on page 103). The NCC manages the Zyxel Device automatically

when it is discovered.

Standalone-to-AC (NXC)

By default, the Zyxel Device must be in the same subnet as the NXC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for

setting it up in a different subnet. Make sure AC Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.5 on page 102). The

NXC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered.

NXC-to-NCC

Register the Zyxel Device at the NCC website. Make sure that NCC Discovery is enabled on your Zyxel

Device (see Section 9.6 on page 103). In the NXC web configurator, select the Zyxel Device and press

the Nebula button. The NCC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered.

NCC-to-NXC

Unregister the Zyxel Device at the NCC portal. By default, the Zyxel Device must be in the same subnet

as the NXC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for setting it up in a different subnet. Make sure AC Discovery

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

27

is enabled (see Section 9.5 on page 102). The NXC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is

discovered.

NCC-to-Standalone

Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC organization/site. Reset the Zyxel Device to factory defaults

(see Section 29.6 on page 247).

AC-to-Standalone

Use the Reset button to return the Zyxel Device to its factory default settings (see Section 29.6 on page

247).

2.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility

ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects

devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to

be near it.

The ZON Utility issues requests via Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the device

responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model

name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you

can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can

download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your computer (Windows operating system).

2.3.1 Requirements

Before installing the ZON Utility on your PC, please make sure it meets the requirements listed below.

Operating System

At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:

Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)

Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)

Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)

Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions)

Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >

Properties. You should see this information in the General tab.

Note: It is suggested that you install Npcap, the packet capture library for Windows operating

systems, and remove WinPcap or any other installed packet capture tools before you

install the ZON utility.

Hardware

Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC.

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

28

Core i3 processor

•2GB RAM

100MB free hard disk

WXGA (Wide XGA 1280×800)

2.3.2 Run the ZON Utility

1Double-click the ZON Utility to run it.

2The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON

Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen.

Figure 6 Supported Devices and Versions

If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show

information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported

model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON

utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site.

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

29

Figure 7 ZON Utility Screen

3Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected.

Figure 8 Network Adapter

4Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network.

Figure 9 Discovery

5The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered.

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

30

Figure 10 ZON Utility Screen

6Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for

your devices.

Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the

device using the ZON utility icons.

Figure 11 Password Prompt

The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen.

Table 6 ZON Utility Icons

ICON DESCRIPTION

1 IP configuration Change the selected device’s IP address.

2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address.

3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting

or upgrading new firmware.

4 Reset Configuration to

Default

Use this icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will

lose all previous configurations.

5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink.

6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will

need a username and password to log in.

7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model. Make

sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website to your computer and

unzipped it in advance.

8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know

the current admin password before changing to a new one.

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

31

The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen.

2.4 Ways to Access the Zyxel Device

You can use the following ways to configure the Zyxel Device.

Web Configurator

The Web Configurator allows easy Zyxel Device setup and management using an Internet browser. If

your Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC or an AC, use this only for troubleshooting if you cannot

connect to the Internet. This User’s Guide provides information about the Web Configurator.

9 Configure NCC

Discovery

You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the

Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If it’s

enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected

device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into the Nebula cloud

management mode.

10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP.

11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again.

12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected

device.

13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adaptor for the computer on which the ZON utility is

installed, and the utility language.

Table 7 ZON Utility Fields

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Type This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered.

Model This field displays the model name of the discovered device.

Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.

MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.

IP Address This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that

first received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility.

System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.

Location This field displays where the discovered device is.

Status This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done

successfully. As the Zyxel Device does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address

and Flash Locator LED, this field displays “Update failed”, “Not support Renew IP

address” and “Not support Flash Locator LED” respectively.

NCC Discovery This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC)

discovery feature. If it’s enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC.

Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, it’ll go into

the Nebula cloud management mode.

Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number.

Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device.

Table 6 ZON Utility Icons

ICON DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2 AP Management

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

32

NCC

This is the primary means by which you manage the Zyxel Device in cloud (NCC) mode. With the NCC,

you can remotely manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through a cloud-based network management

system. See the NCC User’s Guide for more information.

ZON Utility

Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility is a utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a

simple and efficient way. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your

computer (Windows operating system). For more information on ZON Utility see Section 2.3 on page 27.

Command-Line Interface (CLI)

The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the Zyxel Device. You can access it using

remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet) or via the console port. See the Command Reference

Guide for more information.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

The Zyxel Device can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this User’s Guide.

2.5 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device

Do the following things regularly to make the Zyxel Device more secure and to manage it more

effectively.

Change the password often. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different

types of characters, such as numbers and letters.

Write down the password and put it in a safe place.

Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working

configuration may be useful if the Zyxel Device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your

password, you will have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an

earlier configuration file, you won’t have to totally re-configure the Zyxel Device; you can simply

restore your last configuration.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

33

CHAPTER 3

Hardware

See the Quick Start Guide for hardware installation and connections.

3.1 Grounding (WAC6552D-S and WAC6553D-E)

Earth grounding helps protect against lightning and interference.

Note: The power installation must be performed by qualified service personnel and should

conform to the National Electrical Code.

The Zyxel Device must be connected to earth ground to adequately ground the Zyxel

Device and protect the operator from electrical hazards.

Qualified service personnel must confirm that the protective earthing terminal of the

building is a valid terminal.

Before connecting the ground, ensure that a qualified service personnel has attached

an appropriate ground lug to the ground cable.

1Remove one of the ground screws from the Zyxel Device’s rear panel.

2Secure a green/yellow ground cable (18 AWG or smaller) to the Zyxel Device’s rear panel using the

ground screw.

3Attach the other end of the cable to the ground, either to the same ground electrode as the pole you

installed the Zyxel Device on or to the main grounding electrode of the building.

Note: Follow your country’s regulations and safety instructions to electrically ground the Zyxel

Device properly. If you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available, contact the

appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician.

Warning! Connect the ground cable before you connect any other

cables or wiring.

The figure below illustrates how the ground cable (A) is attached to the Zyxel Device and goes to the

earth ground (B).

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

34

Figure 12 Grounding Example

3.2 Zyxel Device Models With Single LEDs

The LEDs of some Zyxel Device models can be controlled by using the suppression feature such that the

LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device is ready. Some Zyxel Device models also has Locator LED

which allows you to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device among several devices in the network.

See Section 1.4 on page 19 to check which models support these features. Refer to Chapter 21 on page

219 for the LED Suppression and Locator menus in standalone mode.

The following models have single LEDs: NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123AC, NWA5123-AC

HD, WAC6303D-S, NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S.

3.2.1 NWA1123-ACv2

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

35

Figure 13 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.

Table 8 NWA1123-ACv2 LED

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Amber Blinks amber for 1 second

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the Zyxel

Device is booting up or is connecting to the NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use and its wireless interface is

activated.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed,

the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel

Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the

NCC.

Fast Blinking (On for 50ms,

Off for 50ms)

The Locator LED is on.

Amber On The Zyxel Device is powered up.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

36

3.2.2 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD

The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6303D-S or NWA5123-AC HD.

Figure 14 WAC6303D-S LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6303D-S or NWA5123-AC HD.

Red Steady On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system

failure.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Uplink interface is down.

Fast Blinking (On for 50ms,

Off for 50ms)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Table 8 NWA1123-ACv2 LED (continued)

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Table 9 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD LED

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Amber Blinks amber for 1 second

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting with NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC or an AC.

Green

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

37

3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 2 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC but the uplink is

disconnected.

Green

Green Slow Blinking (On for 1

second, Off for 1 second)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the

Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel

Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet

registered with the NCC.

Green Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page

67).

Amber Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on

page 67).

Bright Blue Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67).

White Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power

mode (see Table 26 on page 67).

Slow Blinking (On for

100ms per second)

Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the

configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10

minutes.

Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1

time, Off for 1 second)

The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a

channel for radar signals.

Red On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system

failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

milliseconds, Off for 50

milliseconds)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3 seconds)

The Uplink port of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is

disconnected.

Table 9 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD LED (continued)

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

38

Figure 15 NWA1123-AC HD LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.

Table 10 NWA1123-AC HD LED

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Amber Blinks amber for 1 second

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up or connecting with NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC.

Green

Green Slow Blinking (On for 1

second, Off for 1 second)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the

Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel

Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet

registered with the NCC.

Green Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page

67).

Amber Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on

page 67).

Bright Blue Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67).

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

39

3.2.4 NWA5123-AC

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA5123-AC.

Figure 16 NWA5123-AC LED

White Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power

mode (see Table 26 on page 67).

Slow Blinking (On for

100ms per second)

Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the

configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10

minutes.

Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1

time, Off for 1 second)

The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a

channel for radar signals.

Red On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system

failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

milliseconds, Off for 50

milliseconds)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3 seconds)

The Uplink interface of the Zyxel Device is down.

Table 10 NWA1123-AC HD LED (continued)

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

40

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA5123-AC.

3.2.5 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S.

Table 11 NWA5123-AC LED

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Amber Blinks amber for 1 second

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is discovering an AC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 2 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink

interface is down.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use and its wireless interface is

activated.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed,

or the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings.

Fast Blinking (On for 50ms,

Off for 50ms)

The Locator LED is on.

Amber On The Zyxel Device is powered up.

Red Steady On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system

failure.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Uplink interface is down.

Fast Blinking (On for 50ms,

Off for 50ms)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

41

Figure 17 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S.

Table 12 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Amber Blinks amber for 1 second

and green for 1 second

alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting with NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC or an AC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 2 times and

then turns solid green for 3

seconds.

The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC but the uplink is

disconnected.

Green

Green Slow Blinking (On for 1

second, Off for 1 second)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the

Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel

Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet

registered with the NCC.

Note: WiFi networks on the WAX650S are turned off

automatically when it is connected to a device

that supplies power using IEEE 802.3af PoE.

Green Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page

67).

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

42

3.3 Zyxel Device Models With Multiple LEDs

The LEDs of some Zyxel Device models can be controlled by using the suppression feature such that the

LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device is ready. Some Zyxel Device models also has Locator LED

which allows you to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device among several devices in the network.

See Section 1.4 on page 19 to check which models support these features. Refer to Chapter 21 on page

219 for the LED Suppression and Locator menus in standalone mode.

The following models have multiple LEDs: NWA1123-AC PRO, NWA1302-AC, WAC6103D-I, WAC5302D-S,

WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, WAC6503D-S.

3.3.1 NWA1123-AC PRO

The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC PRO.

Amber Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Device’s wireless

interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected

to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on

page 67).

Bright Blue Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67).

White Steady On The Zyxel Device’s wireless interface is activated, but there

are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power

mode (see Table 26 on page 67).

Slow Blinking (On for

100ms per second)

Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the

configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10

minutes.

Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1

time, Off for 1 second)

The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a

channel for radar signals.

Red On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system

failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

milliseconds, Off for 50

milliseconds)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3 seconds)

The Uplink port of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is

disconnected.

Table 12 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED (continued)

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

43

Figure 18 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 13 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for

1 second alternatively.

The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the

Zyxel Device is booting up.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

sec, Off for 1 sec)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed.

Red On There is a system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot

up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

ms, Off for 50 ms)

The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3 sec)

The Uplink interface is down.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

44

3.3.2 NWA1302-AC

By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the LEDs are turned off by

the NCC, you can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink

and turn off after two minutes.

Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

sec, Off for 1 sec)

The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the

Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered

with the NCC.

Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for

1 second alternatively

The Zyxel Device is searching for (discovering) the NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and

green alternatively 3

times and then turns

solid green for 3

seconds.

The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device.

Green

Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode.

WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz radio is set to “Ceiling” and is active

Amber On The 2.4 GHz radio is set to “Wall” and is active

Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN Green On The 5 GHz radio is set to “Ceiling” and is active

Amber On The 5 GHz radio is set to “Wall” and is active

Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port

at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps).

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port

at 1 Gbps.

Off The port is not connected.

LAN Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps).

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data at 1 Gbps.

Off The LAN port is not connected.

Locator White Blinking The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual

location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the

network.

Off The Locator function is off.

Table 13 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

45

Figure 19 NWA1302-AC LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 14 NWA1302-AC LEDs

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively.

The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the

Zyxel Device is booting up.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

sec, Off for 1 sec)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or

failed.

Fast Blinking (On 50ms,

Off 50ms)

The Locator LED is on.

Red On There is a system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot

up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for 50

ms, Off for 50 ms)

The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3 sec)

The Uplink interface is down.

Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1

sec, Off for 1 sec)

The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the

Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered

with the NCC.

Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively

The Zyxel Device is searching for (discovering) the NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times

and then turns solid

green for 3 seconds.

The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device.

Green

Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

46

3.3.3 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S

The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S.

UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 10/100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 1Gbps.

Off The port is not connected.

WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN Green On The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

LAN Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 10/100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 1 Gbps.

Off The LAN port is not connected.

Table 14 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

47

Figure 20 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 15 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting to the

NCC or to an AC.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1ss)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or

failed.

Red On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot

up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for

50ms, Off for 50ms)

The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Uplink interface is down.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 2

times, Off for 3s)

The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink is

disconnected.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

48

3.3.4 WAC6103D-I

The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6103D-I.

Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by a the NCC or an AC.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for an AC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the

Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered

with the NCC.

Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode.

Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively

The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for the NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times

and then turns solid

green for 3 seconds.

The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device.

Green

WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN Green On The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 1 Gbps.

Off The port is not connected.

LAN Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 1 Gbps.

Off The LAN port is not connected.

Locator White Blinking The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual

location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in

the network.

Off The Locator function is off.

Table 15 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

49

Figure 21 WAC6103D-I LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 16 WAC6103D-I LEDs

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively.

The Zyxel Device is booting up.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or

failed.

Red

On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot

up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for

50ms, Off for 50ms)

The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Uplink port is disconnected.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

50

3.3.5 WAC5302D-S

The LEDs automatically turn off when the WAC5302D-S is ready. You can press the LED ON button for one

second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes.

Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC or the NCC.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for an AC.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the

Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered

with the NCC.

Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode.

Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively

The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for the NCC.

Green

Amber Blinks amber and green

alternatively 3 times

and then turns solid

green for 3 seconds.

The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device.

Green

WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz radio is set to “Ceiling” and is active

Amber On The 2.4 GHz radio is set to “Wall” and is active

Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN Green On The 5 GHz radio is set to “Ceiling” and is active

Amber On The 5 GHz radio is set to “Wall” and is active

Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 1 Gbps.

Off The port is not connected.

LAN Amber On The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 1 Gbps.

Off The LAN port is not connected.

Locator White Blinking The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual

location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in

the network.

Off The Locator function is off.

Table 16 WAC6103D-I LEDs (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

51

Figure 22 WAC5302D-S LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 17 WAC5302D-S LEDs

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

PWR/SYS Amber Blinks amber for 1

second and green for 1

second alternatively.

The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the

WAC is booting up.

Green

Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or

failed.

Fast Blinking (On 50ms,

Off 50ms)

The Locator LED is on.

Red On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot

up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure.

Fast Blinking (On for

50ms, Off for 50ms)

The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Uplink interface is down.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 2

times, Off for 3s)

The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink is

disconnected.

Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by a controller.

Slow Blinking (Blink for 3

times, Off for 3s)

The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for a controller.

Slow Blinking (On for 1s,

Off for 1s)

The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the

Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered

with the NCC.

Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode.

Chapter 3 Hardware

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

52

UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 10/100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the

port at 1 Gbps.

Off The port is not connected.

WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.

WLAN Green On The 5 GHz WLAN is active.

Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.

LAN Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection.

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 10/100 Mbps.

Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000

Mbps).

Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port

at 1 Gbps.

Off The LAN port is not connected.

Table 17 WAC5302D-S LEDs (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

53

CHAPTER 4

The Web Configurator

4.1 Overview

The Zyxel Device Web Configurator allows management using an Internet browser.

In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:

Use Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 36.0 and later versions, Safari 9.0 and later

versions, or Google Chrome 38.0 and later versions.

Allow pop-up windows.

Enable JavaScript (enabled by default).

Enable Java permissions (enabled by default).

Enable cookies.

The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher.

4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator

1Make sure your Zyxel Device hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.

2If the Zyxel Device and your computer are not connected to a DHCP server, make sure your computer’s

IP address is in the range between «192.168.1.3» and «192.168.1.254».

3Browse to the Zyxel Device’s DHCP-assigned IP address or http://192.168.1.2. The Login screen appears. If

you are in NCC mode, check the NCC’s AP > Monitor > Access Point screen for the Zyxel Device’s LAN IP

address.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

54

If a Zyxel Device is in standalone mode and supports NCC, the login page displays as shown in the

following figure.

Click Nebula Mode to show the following screen. Here, you can watch a tutorial for using the Zyxel

Nebula Control Center (NCC) or access the link to the NCC, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise,

continue with the next step. The NCC is a cloud-based network management system that allows you to

remotely manage and monitor the Zyxel Device (see Section 2.1.2 on page 24).

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

55

If you want to return to the login page, click Standalone Mode and follow the next steps.

4Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”). If the Zyxel Device is being

managed or has been managed by the NCC, check the NCC’s Site-Wide > Configure > General setting

screen for the Zyxel Device’s current password.

5Select the language you prefer for the Web Configurator. Click Login.

6The wizard screen opens when the Zyxel Device is accessed for the first time or when you reset the Zyxel

Device to its default factory settings.

7If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears.

Otherwise, the dashboard appears.

The Update Admin Info screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and default

password. If you change the password for the default user account, this screen does not appear

anymore.

4.3 Navigating the Web Configurator

The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. The

following figures show the Dashboard screen for standalone mode and for cloud (NCC) mode. The

screen is different for standalone mode and cloud (NCC) mode and may vary slightly for different

models.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

56

Figure 23 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen for Standalone Mode

Figure 24 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen for Cloud Mode

The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:

A — Title Bar

B — Navigation Panel

C — Main Window

4.3.1 Title Bar

The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how

deep into the Web Configurator you navigate. If your Zyxel Device is in NCC mode, not all icons will be

available in the Title Bar (see Figure 24 on page 56).

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

57

Figure 25 Title Bar

The icons provide the following functions.

Site Map

Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screen’s link to go to

that screen.

Figure 26 Site Map

CLI Messages

Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. These commands appear in a

popup window, such as the following.

Table 18 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Wizard Click this to open the wizard. See Chapter 7 on page 73 for more information.

Help Click this to open the help page for the current screen.

Forum Click this to go to Zyxel Biz User Forum, where you can get the latest Zyxel Device information

and have conversations with other people by posting your messages.

Site Map Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens.

CLI Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web

Configurator.

Logout Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.

nebula Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

58

Figure 27 CLI Messages

Click Clear to remove the currently displayed information.

Note: See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.

4.3.2 Navigation Panel

Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Zyxel Device features. Click

the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel menus or

drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the Zyxel Device’s navigation panel menus and

their screens.

Figure 28 Navigation Panel

4.3.3 Standalone Mode Navigation Panel Menus

The following are the screens available in standalone mode. Note that some screens may not be

available for your Zyxel Device model. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to see which features your Zyxel

Device model supports.

Dashboard

The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and

interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs.

For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 6 on page 67.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

59

Monitor Menu

The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.

Configuration Menu

Use the configuration menu screens to configure the Zyxel Device’s features.

Table 19 Monitor Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION

Network Status Network

Status

Display general LAN interface information and packet statistics.

Wireless

AP Information Radio List Display information about the radios of the connected APs.

Station Info Station List Display information about the connected stations.

WDS Link Info WDS Link Info Display statistics about the Zyxel Device’s WDS (Wireless Distribution

System) connections.

Detected Device Detected

Device

Display information about suspected rogue APs.

Log View Log Display log entries for the Zyxel Device.

Table 20 Configuration Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION

Network IP Setting Configure the IP address for the Zyxel Device Ethernet interface.

VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.

Storm Control Enable or disable the broadcast/multicast storm control feature.

AC Discovery Configure the Zyxel Device’s AP Controller settings.

NCC Discovery Configure proxy server settings to access the NCC.

Wireless

AP

Management WLAN Setting Manage the Zyxel Device’s general wireless settings.

Rogue AP Rogue/Friendly AP

List

Configure how the Zyxel Device monitors for rogue APs.

Load Balancing Load Balancing Configure load balancing for traffic moving to and from wireless

clients.

DCS DCS Configure dynamic wireless channel selection.

Bluetooth Advertising Settings Configure the beacon ID(s) to be included in the Bluetooth

advertising packet.

Object

User User Create and manage users.

Setting Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions,

and rules to force user authentication.

AP Profile Radio Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be

associated with different APs.

SSID Create and manage wireless SSID, security, MAC filtering, and layer-2

isolation files that can be associated with different APs.

MON Profile MON Profile Create and manage rogue AP monitoring files that can be

associated with different APs.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

60

Maintenance Menu

Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and

reboot or shut down the Zyxel Device.

4.3.4 Cloud Mode Navigation Panel Menus

If your Zyxel Device is in NCC mode, you only need to use the Web Configurator for troubleshooting if

your Zyxel Device cannot connect to the Internet.

WDS Profile WDS Create and manage WDS profiles that can be used to connect to

different APs in WDS.

Certificate My Certificates Create and manage th e Zyxel Device’s certificates.

Trusted Certificates Import and manage certificates from trusted sources.

System

Host Name Host Name Configure the system and domain name for the Zyxel Device.

Power Mode Power Mode Configure the Zyxel Device’s power settings.

Date/Time Date/Time Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the Zyxel Device.

WWW Service Control Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication.

SSH SSH Configure SSH server and SSH service settings.

TELNET TELNET Configure telnet server settings for the Zyxel Device.

FTP FTP Configure FTP server settings.

SNMP SNMP Configure SNMP communities and services.

Log & Report

Email Daily

Report Email Daily Report Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to

send.

Log Setting Log Setting Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers.

Table 21 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION

File Manager Configuration File Manage and upload configuration files for the Zyxel Device.

Firmware Package View the current firmware version and to upload firmware.

Shell Script Manage and run shell script files for the Zyxel Device.

Diagnostics Diagnostics Collect diagnostic information.

LEDs Suppression Enable this feature to keep the LEDs off after the Zyxel Device starts.

Locator Enable this feature to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device

between several devices in the network.

Antenna Antenna Switch Change antenna orientation for the radios.

Reboot Reboot Restart the Zyxel Device.

Shutdown Shutdown Turn off the Zyxel Device.

Table 20 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)

FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

61

Dashboard

The dashboard displays general Zyxel Device information, and AP information in widgets that you can

re-arrange to suit your needs.

For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 26 on page 229.

Configuration Menu

Use the configuration menu screens to configure the Zyxel Device’s features.

4.3.5 Tables and Lists

The Web Configurator tables and lists are quite flexible and provide several options for how to display

their entries.

4.3.5.1 Manipulating Table Display

Here are some of the ways you can manipulate the Web Configurator tables.

1Click a column heading to sort the table’s entries according to that column’s criteria.

2Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The

options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what

you can do:

Sort in ascending alphabetical order

Sort in descending (reverse) alphabetical order

Select which columns to display

•Group entries by field

•Show entries in groups

Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text.

Table 22 Configuration Menu Screens Summary

FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION

Network IP Setting Configure the IP address for the Zyxel Device Ethernet interface.

VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

62

3Select a column heading cell’s right border and drag to re-size the column.

4Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark

displays next to the column’s title when you drag the column to a valid new location.

5Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control

how many entries display at a time.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

63

4.3.5.2 Working with Table Entries

The tables have icons for working with table entries. A sample is shown next. You can often use the [Shift]

or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate.

Table 23 Common Table Icons

Here are descriptions for the most common table icons.

Table 24 Common Table Icons

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered list is

important (features where the Zyxel Device applies the table’s entries in order like the

firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the

selected entry.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to

remove it before doing so.

Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use

the entry.

64

PART I

Standalone

Configuration

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

65

CHAPTER 5

Standalone Configuration

5.1 Overview

The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode by default. Use the web configurator to manage and configure

the Zyxel Device directly. As shown in the following figure, wireless clients can connect to the Zyxel

Device (A) to access network resources.

5.2 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device

Here are some of the ways to start and stop the Zyxel Device.

Always use Maintenance > Shutdown or the shutdown command

before you turn off the Zyxel Device or remove the power. Not doing so

can cause the firmware to become corrupt.

Table 25 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device

METHOD DESCRIPTION

Turning on the power A cold start occurs when you turn on the power to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device

powers up, checks the hardware, and starts the system processes.

Rebooting the Zyxel

Device

A warm start (without powering down and powering up again) occurs when you use the

Reboot button in the Reboot screen or when you use the reboot command. The Zyxel

Device writes all cached data to the local storage, stops the system processes, and then

does a warm start.

Chapter 5 Standalone Configuration

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

66

The Zyxel Device does not stop or start the system processes when you apply configuration files or run

shell scripts although you may temporarily lose access to network resources.

Using the RESET button If you press the RESET button on the back of the Zyxel Device, the Zyxel Device sets the

configuration to its default values and then reboots. See Section 29.6 on page 247 for

more information.

Clicking Maintenance

> Shutdown >

Shutdown or using the

shutdown command

Clicking Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or using the shutdown command writes all

cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Wait for the Zyxel

Device to shut down and then manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off

the power.

Disconnecting the

power

Power off occurs when you turn off the power to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device simply

turns off. It does not stop the system processes or write cached data to local storage.

Table 25 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device

METHOD DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

67

CHAPTER 6

Dashboard

6.1 Overview

This screen displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and interface

status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close

individual widgets.

Figure 29 Dashboard

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 26 Dashboard

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Widget Settings (A) Use this link to re-open closed widgets. Widgets that are already open appear grayed out.

Refresh Time Setting

(B)

Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget.

Refresh Now (C) Click this to update the widget’s information immediately.

Close Widget (D) Click this to close the widget. Use Widget Settings to re-open it.

Device Information

System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Zyxel Device on any network. Click the icon

to open the screen where you can change it.

System Location This field displays the location of the Zyxel Device. Click the icon to open the screen where

you can change it.

Model Name This field displays the model name of this Zyxel Device.

Chapter 6 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

68

Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Zyxel Device.

MAC Address

Range This field displays the MAC addresses used by the Zyxel Device. Each physical port or

wireless radio has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet LAN

port, the second MAC address is assigned to the first radio, and so on.

Firmware Version This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Zyxel Device is currently

running. Click the icon to open the screen where you can upload firmware.

Last Firmware

Upgrade Status This field displays whether the latest firmware update was successfully completed.

Last Firmware

Upgrade This field displays the date and time when the last firmware update was made.

System Resources

CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Device’s processing capability is currently

being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show CPU Usage icon that takes

you to a chart of the Zyxel Device’s recent CPU usage.

Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Device’s RAM is currently being used. Hover

your cursor over this field to display the Show Memory Usage icon that takes you to a chart

of the Zyxel Device’s recent memory usage.

Flash Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Device’s onboard flash memory is currently

being used.

Ethernet Neighbor

Local Port

(Description) This field displays the port of the Zyxel Device, on which the neighboring device is

discovered.

Model Name This field displays the model name of the discovered device.

System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.

FW Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.

Port (Description) This field displays the discovered device’s port which is connected to the Zyxel Device.

IP This field displays the IP address of the discovered device. Click the IP address to access

and manage the discovered device using its web configurator.

MAC This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.

WDS (Wireless Distribution System) Uplink/Downlink Status

MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is

connected using WDS.

Radio This field displays the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is

connected using WDS.

Channel This field displays the channel number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device

is connected using WDS.

SSID This field displays the name of the wireless network to which the Zyxel Device is connected

using WDS.

Security Mode This field displays which secure encryption methods is being used by the Zyxel Device to

connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS.

Link Status This field displays the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) and transmission/reception

rate of the wireless connection in WDS.

System Status

System Uptime This field displays how long the Zyxel Device has been running since it last restarted or was

turned on.

Current Date/

Time This field displays the current date and time in the Zyxel Device. The format is yyyy-mm-dd

hh:mm:ss.

Table 26 Dashboard (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 6 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

69

Current Login

User This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of

reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining.

Boot Status This field displays details about the Zyxel Device’s startup state.

OK — The Zyxel Device started up successfully.

Firmware update OK — A firmware update was successful.

Problematic configuration after firmware update — The application of the configuration

failed after a firmware upgrade.

System default configuration — The Zyxel Device successfully applied the system default

configuration. This occurs when the Zyxel Device starts for the first time or you intentionally

reset the Zyxel Device to the system default settings.

Fallback to lastgood configuration — The Zyxel Device was unable to apply the startup-

config.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file.

Fallback to system default configuration — The Zyxel Device was unable to apply the

lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file

(system-default.conf).

Booting in progress — The Zyxel Device is still applying the system configuration.

Management

Mode This shows whether the Zyxel Device is set to work as a stand alone AP.

Power Mode This displays the Zyxel Device’s power status.

Full — the Zyxel Device receives power using a power adapter and/or through a PoE switch/

injector using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus or IEEE 802.3bt (WAX650S only at the time of writing).

Limited — the Zyxel Device receives power through a PoE switch/injector using IEEE 802.3af

PoE or IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (WAX650S only at the time of writing) even when it is also

connected to a power source using a power adapter.

When the Zyxel Device is in limited power mode, the Zyxel Device throughput decreases

and has just one transmitting radio chain.

It always shows Full if the Zyxel Device does not support power detection. See Section 1.4 on

page 19.

Bluetooth This field displays the Zyxel Device’s Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) capability. Bluetooth Low

Energy, which is also known as Bluetooth Smart, transmits less data over a shorter distance

and consumes less power than classic Bluetooth. The Zyxel Device communicates with

other BLE enabled devices using advertisements.

N/A displays if the Zyxel Device does not support BLE.

Unavailable displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth, but there is no BLE USB dongle

connected to the USB port of the Zyxel Device. Some Zyxel Devices, such as the WAC5302D-

S, need to have a supported BLE USB dongle attached to act as a beacon to broadcast

packets.

Available displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth and detects a BLE device but

advertising is inactive.

Advertising displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth, detects a BLE device, and

advertising is activated, which means the Zyxel Device can broadcast packets to every BLE

device around it.

Interface Status

Summary

If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is

displayed in light gray text. Click the Detail icon to go to a (more detailed) summary screen

of interface statistics.

Name This field displays the name of each interface.

Table 26 Dashboard (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 6 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

70

6.1.1 CPU Usage

Use this screen to look at a chart of the Zyxel Device’s recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click

CPU Usage in the dashboard.

Status This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what

type of interface it is.

Inactive — The Ethernet interface is disabled.

Down — The Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.

Speed / Duplex — The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the

port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).

VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the interface belongs.

IP Addr/Netmask This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP

address is 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask

via DHCP.

IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IP address.

Static — This interface has a static IP address.

DHCP Client — This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server.

Action If the interface has a static IP address, this shows n/a.

If the interface has a dynamic IP address, use this field to get or to update the IP address for

the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server.

WLAN Interface

Status Summary

This displays status information for the WLAN interface.

Status This displays whether or not the WLAN interface is activated.

MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio.

Radio This indicates the radio number on the Zyxel Device.

Band This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.

This shows when the radio is in monitor mode.

OP Mode This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), MON

(monitor), Root AP or Repeater.

Channel This indicates the channel number the radio is using.

Antenna This indicates the antenna orientation for the radio (Wall or Ceiling).

This field is not available if the Zyxel Device does not allow you to adjust antenna orientation

for the Zyxel Device’s radio(s) using the web configurator or a physical switch. Refer to

Section 1.4 on page 19 to see if your Zyxel Device has an antenna switch.

Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to the Zyxel Device.

AP Information This shows a summary of connected wireless Access Points (APs).

All Sensed Device This sections displays a summary of all wireless devices detected by the network. Click the

link to go to the Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device screen.

Un-Classified AP This displays the number of detected unclassified APs.

Rogue AP This displays the number of detected rogue APs.

Friendly AP This displays the number of detected friendly APs.

Table 26 Dashboard (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 6 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

71

Figure 30 Dashboard > CPU Usage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

6.1.2 Memory Usage

Use this screen to look at a chart of the Zyxel Device’s recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this

screen, click Memory Usage in the dashboard.

Figure 31 Dashboard > Memory Usage

Table 27 Dashboard > CPU Usage

LABEL DESCRIPTION

% The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage.

time The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred

Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.

Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.

Chapter 6 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

72

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 28 Dashboard > Memory Usage

LABEL DESCRIPTION

% The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage.

time The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred

Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.

Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

73

CHAPTER 7

Setup Wizard

7.1 Accessing the Wizard

When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the Zyxel Device to its

default configuration, the wizard screen displays.

Note: If you have already configured the wizard screens and want to open it again, click the

Wizard icon on the upper right corner of any Web Configurator screen.

7.2 Using the Wizard

This wizard helps you configure the Zyxel Device IP address, change time zone, daylight saving and

radio settings, and edit an SSID profile to change general wireless and wireless security settings.

7.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings

Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Device’s country code, time zone and daylight saving time.

Country Code: Select the country where the Zyxel Device is located.

Note: The country code field is not available and you cannot change the country code if the

Zyxel Device products comply with the U.S. laws, policies and regulations and are to be

sold to the U.S. market.

Time Zone: Select the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time

zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Enable Daylight Saving: Select the option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time

when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends.

Offset allows you to specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends.

Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).

Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving.

Chapter 7 Setup Wizard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

74

Figure 32 Wizard: Time Settings

7.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection

Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Device’s system password and IP address.

Change Password: Enter a new password and retype it to confirm.

Uplink Connection: Select Auto (DHCP ) if the Zyxel Device is connected to a router with the DHCP server

enabled. You then need to check the router for the IP address assigned to the Zyxel Device in order to

access the Zyxel Device’s web configurator again.

Otherwise, select Static IP when the Zyxel Device is NOT connected to a router or you want to assign it a

fixed IP address. You will need to manually enter:

the Zyxel Device’s IP address and subnet mask.

the IP address of the router that helps forward traffic.

a DNS server’s IP address. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address

and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP

address of a computer before you can access it.

Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard

without saving.

Chapter 7 Setup Wizard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

75

Figure 33 Wizard: Change Password and Uplink Connection

7.2.3 Step 3 Radio

Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Device’s radio transmitter(s).

Channel Selection: Select Auto to have the Zyxel Device automatically choose a radio channel that

has least interference. Otherwise, select Manual and specify a channel the Zyxel Device will use in the

2.4GHz or 5GHz wireless LAN. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country

you are in.

Maximum Output Power: Enter the maximum output power of the Zyxel Device. If there is a high

density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to reduce interference with

other APs.

Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Device’s effective broadcast radius.

Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard

without saving.

Chapter 7 Setup Wizard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

76

Figure 34 Wizard: Radio

7.2.4 Step 4 SSID

Use this screen to enable, disable or edit an SSID profile.

Select an SSID profile and click the Status switch to turn it on or off. To change an SSID profile’s settings,

such as the SSID (WiFi network name) and WiFi password, double-click the SSID profile entry from the list.

See Section 7.2.4.1 on page 76 for more information.

Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard.

Figure 35 Wizard: SSID

7.2.4.1 Edit SSID Profile

Use this screen to configure an SSID profile.

Chapter 7 Setup Wizard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

77

The screen varies depending on the security type you selected.

SSID: Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters for the wireless LAN.

VLAN ID: Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.

Band Mode: Select the wireless band which this profile should use. 2.4 GHz is the frequency used by

IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. 5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients.

Security Type: Select WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. Otherwise, select OPEN to allow

any wireless client to associate this network without authentication.

Personal: If you set Security Type to WPA2 and select Personal, enter a pre-shared key of between 8

and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal

characters.

Enterprise: Select this option and the Primary / Secondary RADIUS Server check box to have the Zyxel

Device use the specified RADIUS server. You have to enter the IP address, port number and shared

secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.

Click OK to proceed. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving.

Figure 36 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-Personal)

Chapter 7 Setup Wizard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

78

Figure 37 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-Enterprise)

7.2.5 Summary

Use this screen to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Save to apply your settings

and complete the wizard setup. Otherwise, click Prev to return to the previous screen or click Cancel to

close the wizard without saving.

Figure 38 Wizard: Summary

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

79

CHAPTER 8

Monitor

8.1 Overview

Use the Monitor screens to check status and statistics information.

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Network Status screen (Section 8.3 on page 80) displays general LAN interface information and

packet statistics.

The AP Information > Radio List screen (Section 8.4 on page 82) displays statistics about the wireless

radio transmitters in the Zyxel Device.

The Station Info screen (Section 8.5 on page 86) displays statistics pertaining to the associated

stations.

The WDS Link Info screen (Section 8.6 on page 87) displays statistics about the Zyxel Device’s WDS

(Wireless Distribution System) connections.

The Detected Device screen (Section 8.7 on page 88) displays information about suspected rogue

APs.

The View Log screen (Section 8.8 on page 91) displays the Zyxel Device’s current log messages. You

can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the log in

this screen.

8.2 What You Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read through the chapter.

Rogue AP

Rogue APs are wireless access points operating in a network’s coverage area that are not under the

control of the network’s administrators, and can open up holes in a network’s security. See Chapter 14

on page 150 for details.

Friendly AP

Friendly APs are other wireless access points that are detected in your network, as well as any others that

you know are not a threat (those from neighboring networks, for example). See Chapter 14 on page 150

for details.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

80

8.3 Network Status

Use this screen to look at general Ethernet interface information and packet statistics. To access this

screen, click Monitor > Network Status.

Figure 39 Monitor > Network Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 29 Monitor > Network Status

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Interface

Summary

IPv6 Interface

Summary

Use the Interface Summary section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Interface Summary

section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your Zyxel Device to an IPv6 network. Both

sections have similar fields as described below.

Name This field displays the name of the physical Ethernet port on the Zyxel Device.

Status This field displays the current status of each physical port on the Zyxel Device.

Down — The port is not connected.

Speed / Duplex — The port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting

(Full or Half).

VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the port belongs.

IP Addr/Netmask

IP Address

This field displays the current IP address (and subnet mask) of the interface. If the IP address is

0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network) or :: (in the IPv6 network), the interface does not have an IP address

yet.

IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IPv4 address.

Static — This interface has a static IPv4 address.

DHCP Client — This interface gets its IPv4 address from a DHCP server.

Action Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new

DHCP request to a DHCP server. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to

update its IP address, this field displays n/a.

Port Statistics Table

Poll Interval Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Set Interval.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

81

8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph

Use the port statistics graph to look at a line graph of packet statistics for the Ethernet port. To view, click

Monitor > Network Status and then the Switch to Graphic View button.

Set Interval Click this to set the Poll Interval the screen uses.

Stop Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting the

Poll Interval and clicking Set Interval.

Switch to Graphic

View

Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph.

Name This field displays the name of the interface.

Status This field displays the current status of the physical port.

Down — The physical port is not connected.

Speed / Duplex — The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex

setting (Full or Half).

TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the physical port

since it was last connected.

RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received by the Zyxel Device on the physical port

since it was last connected.

Tx Bcast This field displays the number of broadcast packets transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the

physical port since it was last connected.

Rx Bcast This field displays the number of broadcast packets received by the Zyxel Device on the

physical port since it was last connected.

Collisions This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected.

Tx This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-

second interval before the screen updated.

Rx This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-

second interval before the screen updated.

Up Time This field displays how long the physical port has been connected.

System Up Time This field displays how long the Zyxel Device has been running since it last restarted or was

turned on.

Table 29 Monitor > Network Status (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

82

Figure 40 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

8.4 Radio List

Use this screen to view statistics for the Zyxel Device’s wireless radio transmitters. To access this screen,

click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List.

Table 30 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.

Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.

Port Selection Select the Ethernet port for which you want to view the packet statistics.

Switch to Grid

View

Click this to display the port statistics as a table.

Kbps/Mbps The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception.

Time The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred.

TX This line represents traffic transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last

connected.

RX This line represents the traffic received by the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last

connected.

Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

83

Figure 41 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for Zyxel Device that supports WDS)

Figure 42 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for Zyxel Device that doesn’t support WDS)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 31 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

More Information Click this to view additional information about the selected radio’s wireless traffic and station

count. Information spans a 24 hour period.

Status This displays whether or not the radio is enabled.

Loading This indicates the AP’s load balance status (UnderLoad or OverLoad) when load balancing is

enabled on the Zyxel Device. Otherwise, it shows when load balancing is disabled or the

radio is in monitor mode.

MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio.

Radio This indicates the radio number on the Zyxel Device to which it belongs.

OP Mode This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), MONITOR, Root

AP or Repeater

AP/WDS Profile This indicates the AP profile name and WDS profile name to which the radio belongs.

This field is available only on the Zyxel Device that supports WDS.

Profile This indicates the AP profile name to which the radio belongs.

This field is available only on the Zyxel Device that doesn’t support WDS.

Frequency Band This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.

This shows when the radio is in monitor mode.

Channel This indicates the radio’s channel ID.

Transmit Power This displays the output power of the radio.

Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to this radio on the Zyxel Device.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

84

8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information

This screen allows you to view a selected radio’s SSID details, wireless traffic statistics and station count

for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select a radio and click the More Information button

in the Radio List screen.

Upload This displays the total number of packets received by the radio.

Download This displays the total number of packets transmitted by the radio.

Channel

Utilization

This indicates how much IEEE 802.11 traffic the radio can receive on the channel. It displays

what percentage of the radio’s channel is currently being used.

Table 31 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

85

Figure 43 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 32 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information

LABEL DESCRIPTION

SSID Detail This list shows information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the specified

radio over the preceding 24 hours.

# This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this list.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

86

8.5 Station List

Use this screen to view statistics pertaining to the associated stations (or “wireless clients”). Click Monitor

> Wireless > Station Info to access this screen.

Figure 44 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

SSID Name This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum.

BSSID This displays a BSSID associated with this radio. The BSSID is tied to the SSID.

Security

Mode This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating.

VLAN This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID.

Traffic Statistics This graph displays the overall traffic information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours.

Kbps/Mbps This y-axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio in megabytes per second.

Time This x-axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio.

Station Count This graph displays the connected station information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours

Stations The y-axis represents the number of connected stations.

Time The x-axis shows the time period over which a station was connected.

Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.

OK Click this to close this window.

Cancel Click this to close this window.

Table 32 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 33 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

# This is the station’s index number in this list.

IP Address This is the station’s IP address.

MAC Address This is the station’s MAC address.

Radio This is the radio number on the Zyxel Device to which the station is connected.

Capability This displays the supported standard currently being used by the station or the standards

supported by the station.

802.11 Features This displays whether the station supports IEEE802.11r, IEEE 802.11k, IEEE 802.11v or none of the

above (N/A).

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

87

8.6 WDS Link Info

Use this screen to view the WDS traffic statistics between the Zyxel Device and a root AP or repeaters.

See Section 1.2 on page 13 to know more about WDS. Click Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link I nfo to access

this screen.

Figure 45 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

SSID Name This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single AP

can have multiple SSIDs or networks.

Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the station to connect to the

network.

Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the station’s wireless connection.

Tx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the station.

Rx Rate This is the maximum reception rate of the station.

Association Time This displays the time the station first associated with the Zyxel Device’s wireless network.

Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.

Table 33 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 34 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

WDS Uplink Info

WDS Downlink

Info

Uplink refers to the WDS link from the repeaters to the root AP.

Downlink refers to the WDS link from the root AP to the repeaters.

When the Zyxel Device is in root AP mode and connected to a repeater, only the downlink

information is displayed.

When the Zyxel Device is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP directly or via another

repeater, the uplink information is displayed.

When the Zyxel Device is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP and other repeater(s),

both the uplink and downlink information would be displayed.

# This is the index number of the root AP or repeater in this list.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

88

8.7 Detected Device

Use this screen to view information about surrounding APs which you could mark as Rogue or Friendly.

Click Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device to access this screen. Not all Zyxel Devices support monitor

mode (see Section 1.4 on page 19). For more information about Rogue APs, see Section 10.3 on page

109.

Note: If the Zyxel Device supports monitor mode, the radio or at least one of the Zyxel

Device’s radio must be set to monitor mode (in the Wireless > AP Management screen)

in order to detect other wireless devices in its vicinity.

If the Zyxel Device doesn’t support monitor mode, turn on rogue AP detection in the

Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen to detect other APs.

MAC Address This is the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using

WDS.

Radio This is the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected

using WDS.

SSID Name This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the Zyxel Device is connected using

WDS.

Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the Zyxel Device to connect

to the root AP or repeater using WDS.

Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the wireless connection in WDS.

Tx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is

connected using WDS.

Rx Rate This is the maximum reception rate of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is

connected using WDS.

Association Time This displays the time the Zyxel Device first associated with the wireless network using WDS.

Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.

Table 34 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

89

Figure 46 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (for Zyxel Device that supports Monitor mode)

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

90

Figure 47 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (for Zyxel Device that doesn’t support Monitor mode)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 35 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Discovered APs

Rogue AP This shows how many devices are detected as rogue APs.

Suspected rogue

AP

This shows how many devices are detected as possible rogue APs based on the classification

rule(s) in Section 10.3 on page 109.

Friendly AP This shows how many devices are detected as friendly APs.

Un-classified AP This shows how many devices are detected, but have not been classified as either Rogue or

Friendly by the Zyxel Device.

Detect Now Click this button for the Zyxel Device to scan for APs in the network.

Detected Device

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

91

8.8 View Log

Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging

messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can

select a specific category of log messages (for example, user). You can also look at the debugging log

by selecting Debug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority.

To access this screen, click Monitor > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen.

Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages

automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log

message first.

Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black.

Click a column’s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column’s criteria. Click the heading cell

again to reverse the sort order.

The Web Configurator saves the filter settings once you click Search. If you leave the View Log screen

and return to it later, the last filter settings would still apply.

Mark as Rogue

AP

Click this button to mark the selected AP as a rogue AP. For more on managing rogue APs, see

the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109).

Mark as Friendly

AP

Click this button to mark the selected AP as a friendly AP. For more on managing friendly APs,

see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109).

# This is the detected device’s index number in this list.

Status This indicates the detected device’s status.

Device This indicates the type of device detected.

Role This indicates the detected device’s role (such as friendly or rogue).

Classified by This indicates the detected device’s classification rule.

MAC Address This indicates the detected device’s MAC address.

SSID Name This indicates the detected device’s SSID.

Channel ID This indicates the detected device’s channel ID.

802.11 Mode This indicates the 802.11 mode (a/b/g/n/ac/ax) transmitted by the detected device.

Security This indicates the encryption method (if any) used by the detected device.

Description This displays the detected device’s description. For more on managing friendly and rogue APs,

see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109).

Last Seen This indicates the last time the device was detected by the Zyxel Device.

Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.

Table 35 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

92

Figure 48 Monitor > Log > View Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 36 Monitor > Log > View Log

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Show Filter / Hide

Filter

Click this button to show or hide the filter settings.

If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are

available.

If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source

Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available.

Display Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one

time, or you can view the Debug Log.

Priority This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log

displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error,

warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the

Category is Debug Log.

Source Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that

generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter.

Chapter 8 Monitor

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

93

Destination

Address

This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming

packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter.

Source Interface This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated

the log message.

Destination

Interface

This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that

generated the log message.

Protocol This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would

like to see.

Keyword This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source,

Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You

can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks

()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed.

Search This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter

settings.

Email Log Now Click this button to send log messages to the Active e-mail addresses specified in the Send Log

To field on the Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings screen.

Refresh Click this to update the list of logs.

Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen.

#This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.

Time This field displays the time the log message was recorded.

Priority This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority

field above.

Category This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the

Display and (other) Category fields.

Message This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text “[count=x]”, where x is a

number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple

entries were aggregated to generate into this one.

Source This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the

log message.

Source Interface This field displays the source interface of the packet that generated the log message.

Destination This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated

the log message.

Destination

Interface

This field displays the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message.

Protocol This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message.

Note This field displays any additional information about the log message.

Table 36 Monitor > Log > View Log (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

94

CHAPTER 9

Network

9.1 Overview

This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your

Zyxel Device.

The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device (including

computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network.

These networking devices are also known as hosts.

Figure 49 IP Setup

The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your Zyxel Device. The gateway IP address is 192.168.1.1

and the managed IP address of the Zyxel Device is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the Zyxel Device is

assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used. The gateway and

the Zyxel Device must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate with each other.

9.1.1 AP Controller Management

This discusses using the Zyxel Device with an AP Controller. AP Controllers, such as the NXC, use Control

And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP) to push firmware and/or configurations to the APs

that they manage.

The following figure illustrates a wireless network managed by an AC. You (U) configure the AC (C),

which then automatically updates the configurations of the managed APs (M1 ~ M4).

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

95

Figure 50 AC managed Network Example

Note: The Zyxel Device can be a standalone device or be managed by an AC.

AC Discovery and Management

The link between AC Discovery-enabled access points proceeds as follows:

1An Zyxel Device with AC Discovery enabled joins a wired network (receives a dynamic IP address).

2The Zyxel Device sends out a discovery request, looking for an AC.

3If there is an AC on the network, it receives the discovery request. If the AC, such as NXC, is in Manual

mode it adds the details of the Zyxel Device to its Unmanaged Access Points list, and you decide which

available APs to manage. If the AC is in Always Accept mode, it automatically adds the Zyxel Device to

its Managed Access Points list and provides the managed Zyxel Device with default configuration

information, as well as securely transmitting the DTLS pre-shared key. The managed Zyxel Device is ready

for association with wireless clients.

Managed AP Finds the Controller

A managed Zyxel Device can find the controller in one of the following ways:

Manually specify the controller’s IP address in the Web Configurator’s AC Discovery screen.

Get the controller’s IP address from a DHCP server with the controller’s IP address configured as

option 138.

Get the controller’s IP address from a DNS server SRV (Service) record.

Broadcasting to discover the controller within the broadcast domain.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

96

Note: The AC needs to have a static IP address. If it is a DHCP client, set the DHCP server to

reserve an IP address for the AC.

AC management and IP Subnets

By default, CAPWAP works only between Zyxel Devices with IP addresses in the same subnet.

However, you can configure the Zyxel Device and the AC to use CAPWAP with IP addresses in different

subnets by doing the following.

Activate DHCP. Your network’s DHCP server must support option 138 defined in RFC 5415.

Configure DHCP option 138 with the IP address of the AC on your network.

DHCP Option 138 allows the management request (from the Zyxel Device) to reach the AC in a different

subnet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 51 CAPWAP and DHCP Option 138

Notes on AC management

This section lists some additional features of Zyxel’s implementation of the CAPWAP protocol.

When the AC uses its internal Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server, managed

Zyxel Devices also use the AC’s authentication server to authenticate wireless clients.

If an Zyxel Device’s link to the ACis broken, the Zyxel Device continues to use the wireless settings with

which it was last provided.

9.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The IP Setting screen (Section 9.2 on page 97) configures the Zyxel Device’s LAN IP address.

The VLAN screen (Section 9.3 on page 98) configures the Zyxel Device’s VLAN settings.

The Storm Control screen (Section 9.4 on page 101) turns on or off the traffic storm control feature on

the Zyxel Device.

The AC Discovery screen (Section 9.5 on page 102) configures the Zyxel Device’s AP Controller (AC)

settings.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

97

The NCC Discovery screen (Section 9.6 on page 103) configures the Zyxel Device’s Nebula Control

Center (NCC) discovery settings.

9.2 IP Setting

Use this screen to configure the IP address for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click

Configuration > Network > IP Setting.

Figure 52 Configuration > Network > IP Setting

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 37 Configuration > Network > IP Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

IP Address Assignment

Get

Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address,

subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.

Use Fixed IP

Address Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.

IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface.

Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates

what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.

Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway. The Zyxel Device sends packets to the gateway when

it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the

same network as the interface.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

98

9.3 VLAN

This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Device’s VLAN settings.

Note: Misconfiguring the management VLAN settings in your Zyxel Device can make it

inaccessible. If this happens, you will have to reset the Zyxel Device.

DNS Server IP

Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server.

IPv6 Address Assignment

Enable Stateless

Address Auto-

configuration

(SLAAC)

Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device

will generate an IPv6 address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network.

Link-Local

Address This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the Zyxel Device

generates itself for the LAN interface.

IPv6 Address/

Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for the LAN interface if you want to use a static

IP address. This field is optional.

The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all

computers in the network, that is, the network address.

Gateway Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal

notation.

Metric Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on the LAN interface. The Zyxel Device decides

which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If

two or more gateways have the same priority, the Zyxel Device uses the one that was

configured first. Enter zero to set the metric to 1024 for IPv6.

DHCPv6 Client Select this option to set the Zyxel Device to act as a DHCPv6 client.

DUID This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the Zyxel Device, which is unique and

used for identification purposes when the Zyxel Device is exchanging DHCPv6 messages

with others. See Appendix B on page 273 for more information.

Request Address Select this option to get an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server.

DHCPv6 Request

Options

Select this option to determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server.

DNS Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the DNS server.

NTP Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the NTP server.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 37 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

99

Figure 53 Management VLAN Setup

In the figure above, to access and manage the Zyxel Device from computer A, the Zyxel Device and

switch B’s ports to which computer A and the Zyxel Device are connected should be in the same VLAN.

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical

networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one

group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same

group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.

VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable

logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and

every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.

IEEE 802.1Q Tag

The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN

membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority.

The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to

process the frame across the network.

Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click

Configuration > Network > VLAN.

The screen varies depending on whether the Zyxel Device has an extra Ethernet port (except the uplink

port).

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

100

Figure 54 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for Zyxel Device with multiple Ethernet ports)

Figure 55 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for Zyxel Device with one Ethernet port)

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 38 Configuration > Network > VLAN

LABEL DESCRIPTION

VLAN Settings

Management

VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device.

As Native VLAN Select this option to treat this VLAN ID as a VLAN created on the Zyxel Device and not one

assigned to it from outside the network.

LAN Setting

Port Setting

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

Activate/

Inactivate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click

Inactivate.

# This is the index number of the port.

Status This field indicates whether the port is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb).

Port This field displays the name of the port.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

101

9.4 Storm Control

Traffic storm control limits the number of broadcast and/or multicast packets the Zyxel Device receives

on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast and/or multicast packets is reached,

the subsequent packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast and/or multicast

packets in your network.

Note: The maximum traffic rate can be changed using the CLI (see the CLI Reference Guide).

To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Storm Control.

Figure 56 Configuration > Network > Storm Control

PVID This field displays the port number of the VLAN ID.

VLAN Configuration

Add Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered list is

important (features where the Zyxel Device applies the table’s entries in order like the SSID

for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the

selected entry.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to

remove it before doing so.

Activate/

Inactivate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click

Inactivate.

# This is the index number of the VLAN ID

Status This field indicates whether the VLAN is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb).

Name This field displays the name of each VLAN.

VID This field displays the VLAN ID.

Member This field displays the VLAN membership to which the port belongs.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 38 Configuration > Network > VLAN (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

102

Each field is described in the following table.

9.5 AC (AP Controller) Discovery

This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Device’s AC Discovery settings. You can have the Zyxel

Device managed by an AC on your network. When you do this, the Zyxel Device can be configured

ONLY by the AC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for more information on AC management.

Note: The AC Discovery settings are not available in all Zyxel Devices. See Section 1.4 on page

19 for more information.

If you want to return the Zyxel Device to function in standalone mode, you can do one of the two

following options:

Press the Reset button.

Check the AC for the Zyxel Device’s IP address and use FTP to upload the default configuration file to

the Zyxel Device. You can get the configuration file at conf/system-default.conf. You must reboot the

Zyxel Device after uploading the configuration file.

To access the Controller Discover screen, click Configuration > Network > AC Discovery.

Figure 57 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery

Table 39 Configuration > Network > Storm Control

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Broadcast Storm

Control

Select the check box to enable broadcast storm control on the Zyxel Device. Enabling this

will drop ingress broadcast traffic in the physical Ethernet port if it exceeds the maximum

traffic rate.

Multicast Storm

Control

Select the check box to enable multicast storm control on the Zyxel Device. Enabling this will

drop ingress multicast traffic in the physical Ethernet port if it exceeds the maximum traffic

rate.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

103

Each field is described in the following table.

9.6 NCC Discovery

You can manage the Zyxel Device through the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC). Use this screen to

configure the proxy server settings if the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server.

To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery.

Figure 58 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery

Table 40 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Discovery Setting

Auto Select this option to use DHCP option 138/DNS SRV record/Broadcast to get the AC’s IP

address. If the Zyxel Device and a Zyxel AC, such as the NXC2500 or NXC5500, are in the

same subnet, it will be managed by the controller automatically.

Manual Select this option and enter the IP address of the AC manually. This is necessary when

the AP Controller is not in the same subnet and you want it to manage the Zyxel

Device.

Primary / Secondary

Static AC IP Specify the primary and secondary IP address of the AC to which the Zyxel Device

connects.

Disable Select this to manage the Zyxel Device using its own web configurator, neither

managing nor being managed by other devices. Please note if an AP Controller is in

the same subnet, you will need to click Disable if you do not want the Zyxel Device to

be managed.

Apply Click Apply to save the information entered in this screen.

If you select Auto or Manual, the AC uploads the firmware package for managed AP

mode to the Zyxel Device and you cannot log in as the web configurator is disabled;

you must manage the Zyxel Device through the AC on your network.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 9 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

104

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 41 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Nebula Control Center Status

Internet This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Internet.

Nebula Connectivity This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control

Center (NCC).

Nebula Control Center Discovery Setting

Enable Select this option to turn on NCC discovery on the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device will try

to discover the NCC and go into NCC management mode when it is connected to the

Internet and has been registered in the NCC.

If NCC discovery is disabled, the Zyxel Device will not discover the NCC and remain in

standalone operation.

Use Proxy to Access NCC If the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure

the proxy server settings so that the Zyxel Device can access the NCC through the

proxy server.

Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server.

Proxy Port Enter the service port number used by the proxy server.

Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to

the NCC.

User Name Enter your proxy user name.

Password Enter your proxy password.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

105

CHAPTER 10

Wireless

10.1 Overview

This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your Zyxel Device.

The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.

Figure 59 Example of a Wireless Network

The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called

wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the

printer) or with the Internet. Your Zyxel Device is the AP.

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The AP Management screen (Section 10.2 on page 106) allows you to manage the Zyxel Device’s

general wireless settings.

The Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109) allows you to assign APs either to the rogue AP list or

the friendly AP list.

The Load Balancing screen (Section 10.4 on page 114) allows you to configure network traffic load

balancing between the APs and the Zyxel Device.

The DCS screen (Section 10.5 on page 116) allows you to configure dynamic radio channel selection.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

106

10.1.2 What You Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

Station / Wireless Client

A station or wireless client is any wireless-capable device that can connect to an AP using a wireless

signal.

Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS)

Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is a feature that allows an AP to automatically select the radio

channel which it broadcasts. For more information, see Section 10.6 on page 117.

Load Balancing (Wireless)

Wireless load balancing is the process where you limit the number of connections allowed on an wireless

access point (AP) or you limit the amount of wireless traffic transmitted and received on it so the AP

does not become overloaded.

10.2 AP Management

Use this screen to manage the Zyxel Device’s general wireless settings. Click Configuration > Wireless >

AP Management to access this screen.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

107

Figure 60 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Radio 1 Setting

Radio 1 Activate Select the check box to enable the Zyxel Device’s first (default) radio.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

108

Radio 1 OP Mode Select the operating mode for radio 1.

AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data

traffic through to the Zyxel Device to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an

upstream gateway for managing).

MON Mode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their

information on to the Zyxel Device where it can be determined if those APs are friendly or

rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients (see

Section 1.2.3 on page 15).

Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with

other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to extend its

wireless network.

Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root

AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.

Radio 1 Profile Select the radio profile the radio uses.

Note: You can only apply a 2.4G AP radio profile to radio 1. Otherwise, the first

radio will not be working.

Radio 1 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode.

Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.

Uplink Selection

Mode

This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode.

Select AUTO to have the Zyxel Device automatically use the settings in the applied WDS

profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.

Select Manual to have the Zyxel Device connect to the root AP or repeater with the MAC

address specified in the Radio 1 Uplink MAC Address field.

Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the Zyxel Device in this field. If

there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to

reduce interference with other APs.

Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Device’s effective

broadcast radius.

MBSSID Settings

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

# This field shows the index number of the SSID

SSID Profile This field displays the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.

Radio 2 Setting

Radio 2 Activate This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio.

Select the check box to enable the Zyxel Device’s second radio.

Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

109

10.3 Rogue AP

Use this screen to enable Rogue AP Detection and import/export a rogue or friendly AP list in a txt file.

Click Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP to access this screen.

Radio 2 OP Mode This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio. Select the operating mode for radio 2.

AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data

traffic through to the Zyxel Device to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an

upstream gateway for managing).

MON Mode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their

information on to the Zyxel Device where it can be determined if those APs are friendly or

rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients (see

Section 1.2.3 on page 15).

Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with

other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS to extend its wireless network.

Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root

AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.

Radio 2 Profile This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio. Select the radio profile the radio uses.

Note: You can only apply a 5G AP radio profile to radio 2. Otherwise, the second

radio will not be working.

Radio 2 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode.

Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.

Uplink Selection

Mode

This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode.

Select AUTO to have the Zyxel Device automatically use the settings in the applied WDS

profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.

Select Manual to have the Zyxel Device connect to the root AP or repeater with tbe MAC

address specified in the Radio 2 Uplink MAC Address field.

Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the Zyxel Device in this field. If

there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to

reduce interference with other APs.

Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Device’s effective

broadcast radius.

MBSSID Settings

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the

table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that

you have not yet applied.

# This field shows the index number of the SSID

SSID Profile This field shows the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

110

Rogue APs

A rogue AP is a wireless access point operating in a network’s coverage area that is not under the

control of the network administrator, and which can potentially open up holes in a network’s security.

In the following example, a corporate network’s security is compromised by a rogue AP (RG) set up by

an employee at his workstation in order to allow him to connect his notebook computer wirelessly (A).

The company’s legitimate wireless network (the dashed ellipse B) is well-secured, but the rogue AP uses

inferior security that is easily broken by an attacker (X) running readily available encryption-cracking

software. In this example, the attacker now has access to the company network, including sensitive

data stored on the file server (C).

Figure 61 Rogue AP Example

Friendly APs

If you have more than one AP in your wireless network, you should also configure a list of “friendly” APs.

Friendly APs are wireless access points that you know are not a threat. It is recommended that you

export (save) your list of friendly APs often, especially if you have a network with a large number of

access points. Exported lists show MAC addresses in txt file format separated by line breaks.

Rogue AP Detection

This feature allows the Zyxel Device to monitor the WiFi signals for other wireless APs (see also Section

1.2.3 on page 15). Detected APs will appear in the Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device screen, where

the Zyxel Device will label APs with the criteria you select in Suspected Rogue AP Classification Rule as a

suspected rogue. The APs which you mark as either rogue or friendly APs in the Monitor > Wireless >

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

111

Detected Device screen will appear in the Wireless > Rogue AP screen. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to

know which models support Rogue AP Detection.

Note: Enabling Rogue AP Detection might affect the performance of wireless clients

associated with the Zyxel Device.

Figure 62 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (for Zyxel Devices that support Monitor mode)

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

112

Figure 63 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (for Zyxel Devices that support Rogue AP Detection)

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 43 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Rogue AP Detection Setting

Enable Rogue AP

Detection

Select this check box to detect Rogue APs in the network.

Suspected Rogue AP

Classification Rule

Select the check boxes (Weak Security (Open, WEP, WPA-PSK), Hidden SSID, SSID

Keyword) of the characteristics an AP should have for the Zyxel Device to mark it as a

Rogue AP.

Add Click this to add an SSID Keyword.

Edit Select an SSID Keyword and click this button to modify it.

Remove Select an existing SSID keyword and click this button to delete it.

#This is the SSID Keyword’s index number in this list.

SSID Keyword This field displays the SSID Keyword.

Rogue/Friendly AP List

Add Click this button to add an AP to the list and assign it either friendly or rogue status.

Edit Select an AP in the list to edit and reassign its status.

Remove Select an AP in the list to remove.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

113

10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List

Click Add or select an AP and click the Edit button in the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP table to

display this screen.

Figure 64 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List

Each field is described in the following table.

Role This field indicates whether the selected AP is a rogue-ap or a friendly-ap. To change the

AP’s role, click the Edit button.

MAC Address This field indicates the AP’s radio MAC address.

Description This field displays the AP’s description. You can modify this by clicking the Edit button.

Rogue/Friendly AP List

Importing/Exporting

These controls allow you to export the current list of rogue and friendly APs or import

existing lists.

File Path / Browse /

Importing Enter the file name and path of the list you want to import or click the Browse button to

locate it. Once the File Path field has been populated, click Importing to bring the list into

the Zyxel Device.

You need to wait a while for the importing process to finish.

Exporting Click this button to export the current list of either rogue APs or friendly APS.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 43 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 44 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

MAC Enter the MAC address of the AP you want to add to the list. A MAC address is a unique

hardware identifier in the following hexadecimal format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx where xx is a

hexadecimal number separated by colons.

Description Enter up to 60 characters for the AP’s description. Spaces and underscores are allowed.

Role Select either Rogue AP or Friendly AP for the AP’s role.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the window with changes unsaved.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

114

10.4 Load Balancing

Use this screen to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the APs on your network

(see Load Balancing on page 118). Click Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing to access this

screen.

Figure 65 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 45 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Load

Balancing

Select this to enable load balancing on the Zyxel Device.

Use this section to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the managed

APs in this group.

Mode Select a mode by which load balancing is carried out.

Select By Station Number to balance network traffic based on the number of specified

stations connected to the Zyxel Device.

Select By Traffic Level to balance network traffic based on the volume generated by the

stations connected to the Zyxel Device.

Select By Smart Classroom to balance network traffic based on the number of specified

stations connected to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device ignores association request and

authentication request packets from any new station when the maximum number of

stations is reached.

If you select By Station Number or By Traffic Level, once the threshold is crossed (either the

maximum station numbers or with network traffic), the Zyxel Device delays association

request and authentication request packets from any new station that attempts to make a

connection. This allows the station to automatically attempt to connect to another, less

burdened AP if one is available.

Max Station

Number Enter the threshold number of stations at which the Zyxel Device begins load balancing its

connections.

Traffic Level Select the threshold traffic level at which the Zyxel Device begins load balancing its

connections (Low, Medium, High).

The maximum bandwidth allowed for each level is:

Low — 11 Mbps,

Medium — 23 Mbps

High — 35M bps

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

115

10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections

When your AP becomes overloaded, there are two basic responses it can take. The first one is to

“delay” a client connection. This means that the AP withholds the connection until the data transfer

throughput is lowered or the client connection is picked up by another AP. If the client is picked up by

another AP then the original AP cannot resume the connection.

For example, here the AP has a balanced bandwidth allotment of 6 Mbps. If laptop R connects and it

pushes the AP over its allotment, say to 7 Mbps, then the AP delays the red laptop’s connection until it

can afford the bandwidth or the laptop is picked up by a different AP with bandwidth to spare.

Figure 66 Delaying a Connection

Disassociate

station when

overloaded

This function is enabled by default and the disassociation priority is always Signal Strength

when you set Mode to By Smart Classroom.

Select this option to disassociate wireless clients connected to the AP when it becomes

overloaded. If you do not enable this option, then the AP simply delays the connection until

it can afford the bandwidth it requires, or it transfers the connection to another AP within its

broadcast radius.

The disassociation priority is determined automatically by the Zyxel Device and is as follows:

Idle Timeout — Devices that have been idle the longest will be kicked first. If none of the

connected devices are idle, then the priority shifts to Signal Strength.

Signal Strength — Devices with the weakest signal strength will be kicked first.

Note: If you enable this function, you should ensure that there are multiple APs

within the broadcast radius that can accept any rejected or kicked

wireless clients; otherwise, a wireless client attempting to connect to an

overloaded AP will be disassociated permanently and never be allowed to

connect.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 45 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

116

The second response your AP can take is to disassociate with clients that are pushing it over its balanced

bandwidth allotment.

Figure 67 Disassociating with a client

Connections are cut based on either idle timeout or signal strength. The Zyxel Device first looks to see

which devices have been idle the longest, then starts kicking them in order of highest idle time. If no

connections are idle, the next criteria the Zyxel Device analyzes is signal strength. Devices with the

weakest signal strength are kicked first.

10.5 DCS

Use this screen to configure dynamic radio channel selection (see Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) on

page 106). Click Configuration > Wireless > DCS to access this screen.

Figure 68 Configuration > Wireless > DCS

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 46 Configuration > Wireless > DCS

LABEL DESCRIPTION

DCS Now Click this to have the Zyxel Device scan for and select an available channel immediately.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

117

10.6 Technical Reference

The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this

chapter.

Dynamic Channel Selection

When numerous APs broadcast within a given area, they introduce the possibility of heightened radio

interference, especially if some or all of them are broadcasting on the same radio channel. If the

interference becomes too great, then the network administrator must open his AP configuration options

and manually change the channel to one that no other AP is using (or at least a channel that has a

lower level of interference) in order to give the connected stations a minimum degree of interference.

Dynamic channel selection frees the network administrator from this task by letting the AP do it

automatically. The AP can scan the area around it looking for the channel with the least amount of

interference.

In the 2.4 GHz spectrum, each channel from 1 to 13 is broken up into discrete 22 MHz segments that are

spaced 5 MHz apart. Channel 1 is centered on 2.412 GHz while channel 13 is centered on 2.472 GHz.

Figure 69 An Example Three-Channel Deployment

Three channels are situated in such a way as to create almost no interference with one another if used

exclusively: 1, 6 and 11. When an AP broadcasts on any of these three channels, it should not interfere

with neighboring APs as long as they are also limited to same trio.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 46 Configuration > Wireless > DCS (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

118

Figure 70 An Example Four-Channel Deployment

However, some regions require the use of other channels and often use a safety scheme with the

following four channels: 1, 4, 7 and 11. While they are situated sufficiently close to both each other and

the three so-called “safe” channels (1,6 and 11) that interference becomes inevitable, the severity of it is

dependent upon other factors: proximity to the affected AP, signal strength, activity, and so on.

Finally, there is an alternative four channel scheme for ETSI, consisting of channels 1, 5, 9, 13. This offers

significantly less overlap that the other one.

Figure 71 An Alternative Four-Channel Deployment

Load Balancing

Because there is a hard upper limit on an AP’s wireless bandwidth, load balancing can be crucial in

areas crowded with wireless users. Rather than let every user connect and subsequently dilute the

available bandwidth to the point where each connecting device receives a meager trickle, the load

balanced AP instead limits the incoming connections as a means to maintain bandwidth integrity.

There are three kinds of wireless load balancing available on the Zyxel Device:

Load balancing by station number limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP. If you

know exactly how many stations you want to let connect, choose this option.

For example, if your company’s graphic design team has their own AP and they have 10 computers,

you can load balance for 10. Later, if someone from the sales department visits the graphic design

team’s offices for a meeting and he tries to access the network, his computer’s connection is delayed,

giving it the opportunity to connect to a different, neighboring AP. If he still connects to the AP

regardless of the delay, then the AP may boot other people who are already connected in order to

associate with the new connection.

Load balancing by smart classroom also limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP.

But any new connections will be just rejected when the AP is overloaded.

Chapter 10 Wireless

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

119

Load balancing by traffic level limits the number of connections to the AP based on maximum

bandwidth available. If you are uncertain as to the exact number of wireless connections you will have

then choose this option. By setting a maximum bandwidth cap, you allow any number of devices to

connect as long as their total bandwidth usage does not exceed the configured bandwidth cap

associated with this setting. Once the cap is hit, any new connections are rejected or delayed provided

that there are other APs in range.

Imagine a coffee shop in a crowded business district that offers free wireless connectivity to its

customers. The coffee shop owner can’t possibly know how many connections his AP will have at any

given moment. As such, he decides to put a limit on the bandwidth that is available to his customers but

not on the actual number of connections he allows. This means anyone can connect to his wireless

network as long as the AP has the bandwidth to spare. If too many people connect and the AP hits its

bandwidth cap then all new connections must basically wait for their turn or get shunted to the nearest

identical AP.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

120

CHAPTER 11

Bluetooth

11.1 Overview

Use this screen to configure the iBeacon advertising settings for the Zyxel Device that supports Bluetooth

Low Energy (BLE). Bluetooth Low Energy, which is also known as Bluetooth Smart, transmits less data over

a shorter distance but consumes less power than classic Bluetooth.

On the WAC5302D-S, you need to attach a supported BLE USB dongle to its USB port to have the AP act

as a beacon to broadcast packets. Contact Zyxel customer support if you are not sure whether your BLE

USB dongle is compatible with the Zyxel Device.

11.1.1 What You Need To Know

iBeacon is Apple’s communication protocol on top of Bluetooth Low Energy wireless technology.

Beacons (Bluetooth radio transmitters) or BLE enabled devices broadcast packets to every device

around it to announce their presence. Advertising packets contain their iBeacon ID, which consists of

the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID), major number, and minor number. These packets also contain a

TX (transmit) power measured at a reference point, which is used to approximate a device’s distance

from the beacon. The UUID can be used to identify a service, a device, a manufacturer or an owner.

The 2-byte major number is to identify and distinguish a group, and the 2-byte minor number is to identify

and distinguish an individual.

For example, a company can set all its beacons to share the same UUID. The beacons in a particular

branch uses the same major number, and each beacon in a branch can have its own minor number.

Developers can create apps that respond to the iBeacon ID that your Zyxel Device broadcasts. An app

that is associated with the Zyxel Device’s iBeacon ID can measure the proximity of a customer to a

beacon. This app can then push messages or trigger prompts and actions based on this information. This

allows you to send highly contextual and highly localized advertisements to customers.

COMPANY A

BRANCH X BRANCH Y

BEACON 1 BEACON 2 BEACON 3

UUID EBAECFAF-DFE0-4039-BE5A-F030EED4303C

Major 10 10 20

Minor 12 1

Chapter 11 Bluetooth

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

121

11.2 Bluetooth Advertising Settings

The Zyxel Device communicates with another BLE enabled device for advertisements. Use this screen to

configure up to five beacon IDs to be included in the advertising packet.

To access this screen, click Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings.

Figure 72 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

11.2.1 Edit Advertising Settings

Select an entry in the Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings screen and click the Edit icon to

open the Edit Advertising screen. Use this screen to configure the beacon ID in the Bluetooth advertising

packets.

Table 47 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Edit Click this to edit the selected entry.

Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.

Status This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.

A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.

UUID This field indicates the UUID to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets.

Major This field indicates the major number to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets.

Minor This field indicates the minor number to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 11 Bluetooth

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

122

Figure 73 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 48 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Activate Select this option to enable the advertising settings.

UUID To specify a UUID for the Zyxel Device’s beacon ID, enter 32 hexadecimal digits in the range of

“A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9”, split into five groups separated by hyphens (-). The UUID format is as

follows: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx (8-4-4-4-12)

Generate new

UUID

Click this button to have the Zyxel Device generate a new UUID automatically.

Major Enter an integer from 0 to 65535 as the major value to identify the group to which the beacon

belongs.

Minor Enter an integer from 0 to 65535 as the minor value to identify the individual beacon.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

123

CHAPTER 12

User

12.1 Overview

This chapter describes how to set up user accounts and user settings for the Zyxel Device.

12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The User screen (see Section 12.2 on page 124) provides a summary of all user accounts.

•The Setting screen (see Section 12.3 on page 126) controls default settings, login settings, lockout

settings, and other user settings for the Zyxel Device.

12.1.2 What You Need To Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

User Account

A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the Zyxel Device. User accounts are used in

controlling access to configuration and services in the Zyxel Device.

User Types

These are the types of user accounts the Zyxel Device uses.

Note: The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the

authentication method setting.

Table 49 Types of User Accounts

TYPE ABILITIES LOGIN METHOD(S)

Admin Users

admin Change Zyxel Device configuration (web, CLI) WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP

limited-admin Look at Zyxel Device configuration (web, CLI)

Perform basic diagnostics (CLI)

WWW, TELNET, SSH

Access Users

user Used for the embedded RADIUS server and

SNMPv3 user access

Browse user-mode commands (CLI)

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

124

12.2 User Summary

The User screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen click Configuration >

Object > User.

Figure 74 Configuration > Object > User

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

12.2.1 Add/Edit User

The User Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one.

12.2.1.1 Rules for User Names

Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters.

The user name can only contain the following characters:

Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support)

_ [underscores]

Table 50 Configuration > Object > User

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to create a new entry.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings.

Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to

remove it before doing so.

Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use

the entry.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

User Name This field displays the user name of each user.

User Type This field displays type of user this account was configured as.

admin — this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device

limited-admin — this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to

change it

user — this user has access to the Zyxel Device’s services but cannot look at the

configuration

Description This field displays the description for each user.

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

125

— [dashes]

The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other limitations on

user names are:

User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user ‘bob’ but use ‘BOB’ when connecting via CIFS or FTP,

it will use the account settings used for ‘BOB’ not ‘bob’.

User names have to be different than user group names.

Here are the reserved user names:

To access this screen, go to the User screen, and click Add or Edit.

Figure 75 Configuration > Object > User > Add/Edit A User

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

•adm •admin •any •bin •daemon

•debug •devicehaecived•ftp •games •halt

•ldapusers •lp •mail •news •nobody

operator radius-users root shutdown sshd

sync uucp zyxel

Table 51 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User

LABEL DESCRIPTION

User Name Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters,

underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case

sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some words are

reserved.

User Type Select what type of user this is. Choices are:

admin — this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device

limited-admin — this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to

change it

user — this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access

Password Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 — 63 alphanumeric characters.

Retype Re-enter the password to make sure you have entered it correctly.

Description Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters.

Default descriptions are provided.

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

126

12.3 Setting

This screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the Zyxel

Device.

To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User > Setting.

Authentication

Timeout Settings

This field is not available if the user type is user.

If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings, select

Use Manual Settings then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow.

Lease Time This field is not available if the user type is user.

Enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user is

logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of

minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the

Web Configurator.

Reauthentication

Time

This field is not available if the user type is user.

Type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the Zyxel Device in one session

before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to

make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to

renew the session without logging out.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

Table 51 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

127

Figure 76 Configuration > Object > User > Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 52 Configuration > Object > User > Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

User Default Setting

Default Authentication

Timeout Settings

These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a new

user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are

set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account’s

authentication timeout settings.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can

modify the entry’s settings.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.

User Type These are the kinds of user account the Zyxel Device supports.

admin — this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device

limited-admin — this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not

to change it

user — this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access

Lease Time This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the

number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before the user is

logged out.

Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web

Configurator.

Reauthentication Time This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user account. It

defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the Zyxel Device in one

session before having to log in again. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity

to renew the session without logging out.

User Logon Settings

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

128

12.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings

This screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of user

account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any existing user

accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account’s

authentication timeout settings.

To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Object > User > Setting screen, select one of the Default

Authentication Timeout Settings entry and click the Edit icon.

Figure 77 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings

Limit the number of

simultaneous logons for

administration account

Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins

by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can login as many times as they

want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses.

Maximum number per

administration account This field is effective when Limit … for administration account is checked. Type the

maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user.

User Lockout Settings

Enable logon retry limit Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login

unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked out for

a specified amount of time.

Maximum retry count This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the maximum

number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP address is locked

out for the specified lockout period. The number must be between 1 and 99.

Lockout period This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the number of

minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon retry limit is enabled and the

maximum retry count is reached. This number must be between 1 and 65,535 (about

45.5 days).

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 52 Configuration > Object > User > Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 12 User

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

129

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 53 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

User Type This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the

default settings.

admin — this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device.

limited-admin — this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to

change it.

Lease Time Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session

before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make

the number of minutes unlimited.

Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator.

Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow

access users to renew time automatically, the users can select this check box on their screen

as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires.

Reauthentication

Time

Type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the Zyxel Device in

one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can

enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no

opportunity to renew the session without logging out.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

130

CHAPTER 13

AP Profile

13.1 Overview

This chapter shows you how to configure preset profiles for the Zyxel Device.

13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Radio screen (Section 13.2 on page 131) creates radio configurations that can be used by the

APs.

The SSID screen (Section 13.3 on page 137) configures three different types of profiles for your

networked APs.

13.1.2 What You Need To Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

Wireless Profiles

At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the Zyxel Device are profiles. A profile represents a group

of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the following

wireless profile types:

Radio — This profile type defines the properties of an AP’s radio transmitter. You can have a maximum

of 64 radio profiles on the Zyxel Device.

SSID — This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by an AP.

Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 64 SSID profiles

on the Zyxel Device.

Security — This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the encryption

method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a maximum of 64

security profiles on the Zyxel Device.

MAC Filtering — This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to block

access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a client’s MAC address

is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the MAC Filter profile.

You can have a maximum of 64 MAC filtering profiles on the Zyxel Device.

Layer-2 Isolation — This profile defines the MAC addresses of the devices that you want to allow the

associated wireless clients to have access to when layer-2 isolation is enabled.

SSID

The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is

associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. In other

words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

131

WEP

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP and

the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both the

wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and decryption.

WPA2

WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and

key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption

and user authentication.

IEEE 802.1x

The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless

stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external RADIUS server.

IEEE 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming

IEEE 802.11k is a standard for radio resource management of wireless LANs, which allows clients to

request neighbor lists from the connected AP and discover the best available AP when roaming. An

802.11k neighbor list can contain up to six BSSIDs with the highest RCPI (Received Channel Power

Indicator) value in both bands (5 GHz and 2.4 GHz, in the ratio of 4:2).

The IEEE 802.11v BSS Transition Management feature lets an AP automatically provide load information

of the neighbor APs to clients. It helps the Zyxel Device steer clients to a suitable AP for better

performance or load balancing.

13.2 Radio

This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the Zyxel Device. A radio profile is a list of settings that

an Zyxel Device can use to configure its radio transmitter(s). To access this screen click Configuration >

Object > AP Profile.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the Zyxel Device.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

132

Figure 78 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

13.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile

This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click

the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Table 54 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new radio profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected radio profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected radio profile.

Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

Status This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.

A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile.

Frequency Band This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

133

Figure 79 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Hide / Show

Advanced Settings

Click this to hide or show the Advanced Settings in this window.

General Settings

Activate Select this option to make this profile active.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

134

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profile’s name. Spaces and

underscores are allowed.

802.11 Band Select whether this radio would use the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz band.

802.11 Mode Select how to let wireless clients connect to the AP.

If 802.11 Band is set to 2.4G:

11b/g: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate

with the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device adjusts the transmission rate automatically

according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices.

11n: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to

associate with the Zyxel Device.

11ax: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, and IEEE802.11ax compliant WLAN

devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isn’t compatible with

802.11ax, the Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11n, and

so on.

If 802.11 Band is set to 5G:

11a: allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel

Device.

11n: allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate

with the Zyxel Device.

11ac: allows IEEE802.11n, IEEE802.11a, and IEEE802.11ac compliant WLAN devices to

associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isn’t compatible with 802.11ac, the

Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11n, and so on.

11ax: allows IEEE802.11n, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11ac, and IEEE802.11ax compliant WLAN

devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isn’t compatible with

802.11ax, the Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11ac,

and so on.

Channel Width Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network.

Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your

neighborhood.

Select 20/40 MHz to allow the Zyxel Device to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40

MHz) that has least interference.

Select 20/40/80 MHz to allow the Zyxel Device to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40

or 80 MHz) that has least interference. This option is available only when you select 11ac or

11ax in the 802.11 Mode field.

Note: If the environment has poor signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), the Zyxel Device will

switch to a lower bandwidth.

Channel

Selection This is the radio channel which the signal will use for broadcasting by this radio profile.

DCS: Choose Dynamic Channel Selection to have the Zyxel Device choose a radio

channel that has least interference.

Manual: Choose from the available radio channels in the list. If your Zyxel Device is

outdoor type, be sure to choose non-indoors channels.

Enable DCS

Client Aware Select this to have the Zyxel Device switch channels only when there are no clients

connected to it. If there is a client connected, the Zyxel Device will not switch channels but

generate a log. The Zyxel Device tries to scan and switch channels again at the end of the

specified time interval or at the scheduled time.

If you disable this then the Zyxel Device switches channels immediately regardless of any

client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the Zyxel Device when it

switches channels are dropped.

Blacklist DFS

channels in

presence of radar

This field is available if 802.11 Band is set to 5G and Channel Selection is set to DCS.

Enable this to temporarily blacklist the wireless channels in the Dynamic Frequency

Selection (DFS) range whenever a radar signal is detected by the Zyxel Device.

Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

135

Enable DCS

Client Aware This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS.

Select this to have the Zyxel Device switch channels only when there are no clients

connected to it. If there is a client connected, the Zyxel Device will not switch channels but

generate a log. The Zyxel Device tries to scan and switch channels again at the end of the

specified time interval or at the scheduled time.

If you disable this then the Zyxel Device switches channels immediately regardless of any

client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the Zyxel Device when it

switches channels are dropped.

2.4 GHz Channel

Selection Method This field is available when you set Channel Sele ction to DCS.

Select how you want to specify the channels the Zyxel Device switches between for 2.4

GHz operation.

Select auto to have the Zyxel Device display a 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment field you can

use to limit channel switching to 3 or 4 channels.

Select manual to select the individual channels the Zyxel Device switches between.

Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or

any one of the previously selected channels is not supported.

Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 2.4 GHz Channel

Selection Method to manual.

Select the channels that you want the Zyxel Device to use.

2.4 GHz Channel

Deployment This is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS and the 2.4 GHz Channel Selection

Method is set to auto.

Select Three-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to channels 1,6, and 11, the

three channels that are sufficiently attenuated to have almost no impact on one another.

In other words, this allows you to minimize channel interference by limiting channel-

hopping to these three “safe” channels.

Select Four-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to four channels. Depending

on the country domain, if the only allowable channels are 1-11 then the Zyxel Device uses

channels 1, 4, 7, 11 in this configuration; otherwise, the Zyxel Device uses channels 1, 5, 9, 13

in this configuration. Four channel deployment expands your pool of possible channels

while keeping the channel interference to a minimum.

Enable 5 GHz DFS

Aware This field is available only when you select 5G in the 802.11 Band field, set Channel

Selection to DCS and set 5 GHz Channel Selection Method to auto.

Select this if your APs are operating in an area known to have RADAR devices. This allows

the Zyxel Device to downgrade its frequency to below 5 GHz in the event RADAR signal is

detected, thus preventing it from interfering with that signal.

Enabling this forces the AP to select a non-DFS channel.

5 GHz Channel

Selection Method Select how you want to specify the channels the Zyxel Device switches between for 5 GHz

operation.

Select Auto to have the Zyxel Device automatically select the best channel.

Select manual to select the individual channels the Zyxel Device switches between.

Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or

any one of the previously selected channels is not supported.

Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 5 GHz Channel

Selection Method to manual.

Select the channels that you want the Zyxel Device to use.

Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

136

Time Interval Select this option to have the Zyxel Device survey the other APs within its broadcast radius

at the end of the specified time interval.

DCS Time Interval This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS and select the Time Interval

option.

Enter a number of minutes. This regulates how often the Zyxel Device surveys the other APs

within its broadcast radius. If the channel on which it is currently broadcasting suddenly

comes into use by another AP, the Zyxel Device will then dynamically select the next

available clean channel or a channel with lower interference.

Schedule Select this option to have the Zyxel Device survey the other APs within its broadcast radius

at a specific time on selected days of the week.

Start Time Specify the time of the day (in 24-hour format) to have the Zyxel Device use DCS to

automatically scan and find a less-used channel.

Week Days Select each day of the week to have the Zyxel Device use DCS to automatically scan and

find a less-used channel.

Advanced Settings

Guard Interval This field is available only when the channel width is 20/40MHz or 20/40/80MHz and the

802.11 Mode is either 11n or 11ac.

Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either short or long.

The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to

reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also increases

interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also reduces

interference.

Enable A-MPDU

Aggregation This field is not available when you set 802.11 Mode to 11a or 11b/g.

Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation.

Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with their

802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for

increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error rates.

Enable A-MSDU

Aggregation This field is not available when you set 802.11 Mode to 11a or 11b/g.

Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation.

Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of their

802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC header. This

method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more efficient than A-MPDU

except in environments that are prone to high error rates.

RTS/CTS Threshold Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless clients

that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When enabled, a

wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS (Clear To Send)

before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting packets at the same time

(and causing data collisions).

A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that you

enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to turn RTS/

CTS off.

Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.

This specifies the time period before the Zyxel Device sends the beacon again. The interval

tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before

waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current consumption of the

access point.

DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and

multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management

mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value

can be set from 1 to 255.

Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

137

13.3 SSID

The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an SSID

list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can assign specific

encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them; and a MAC filter list,

which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses.

13.3.1 SSID List

This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An SSID,

or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless client can

connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for wireless frequencies

Enable Signal

Threshold Select the check box to use the signal threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good

throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP.

Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength to

connect to the AP.

Station Signal

Threshold Set a minimum client signal strength. A wireless client is allowed to connect to the AP only

when its signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold.

-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -105 is the weakest.

Disassociate

Station Threshold Set a minimum kick-off signal strength. When a wireless client’s signal strength is lower than

the specified threshold, the Zyxel Device disconnects the wireless client from the AP.

-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -105 is the weakest.

Allow Station

Connection after

Multiple Retries

Select this option to allow a wireless client to try to associate with the AP again after it is

disconnected due to weak signal strength.

Station Retry

Count Set the maximum number of times a wireless client can attempt to re-connect to the AP

Allow 802.11n/

ac/ax stations

only

Select this option to allow only 802.11 n/ac/ax clients to connect, and reject 802.11a/b/g

clients.

Multicast Settings

Transmission

Mode Specify how the Zyxel Device handles wireless multicast traffic.

Select Multicast to Unicast to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless clients

as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the

application’s bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic

provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces

duplicate packets.

Select Fixed Multicast Rate to send multicast traffic to all wireless clients at a single data

rate. You must know the multicast application’s bandwidth requirements and set it in the

following field.

Multicast

Rate(Mbps) If you set Transmission Mode to Fixed Multicast Rate, select a data rate at which the Zyxel

Device transmits multicast packets to wireless clients. For example, to deploy 4 Mbps video,

select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

138

(such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network name when a person

makes a connection to it.

To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List.

Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard.

Figure 80 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (Default)

Figure 81 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (After wizard setup)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 56 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new SSID profile.

This button is not available after you configure the Zyxel Deviceusing the wizard.

Edit Click this to edit the selected SSID profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected SSID profile.

This button is not available after you configure the Zyxel Deviceusing the wizard.

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example, radio

profile).

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile.

SSID This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

139

13.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile

This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the

Add button or select a SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Figure 82 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile

Security Profile This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile.

QoS This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile.

MAC Filtering

Profile

This field indicates which (if any) MAC filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile.

Layer-2 Isolation

Profile

This field indicates which (if any) layer-2 isolation Profile is associated with the SSID profile.

VLAN ID This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile.

Table 56 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

140

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 57 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Create new

Object

Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile.

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the

Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are

allowed.

SSID Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless clients.

Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed.

Security Profile Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the

Create new Object menu to create one.

Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to

enhance your network security.

MAC Filtering

Profile

Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use

the Create new Object menu to create one.

MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a

particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not in

the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections.

The disable setting means no MAC filtering is used.

Layer-2 Isolation

Profile

Select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use

the Create new Object menu to create one.

Layer-2 isolation allows you to prevent wireless clients associated with your Zyxel Device from

communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.

The disable setting means no layer-2 isolation is used.

QoS Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access categories

minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain categories, such as

video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive nature of their data packets.

QoS access categories are as follows:

disable: Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged with

access categories.

WMM: Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The Zyxel Device assigns access categories

to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess effort. If

something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such.

WMM_VOICE: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is recommended if an

SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls.

WMM_VIDEO: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is recommended for

activities like video conferencing.

WMM_BEST_EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as “best effort,” meaning the data

travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good for activities

that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the Internet.

WMM_BACKGROUND: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or “background

traffic”, meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If traffic from an

SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access category is recommended.

For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected to it.

Rate Limiting

Downlink Define the maximum incoming transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a per-station

basis.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

141

13.4 Security List

This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs.

Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations that are

connected to it.

To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the Zyxel Device.

Uplink Define the maximum outgoing transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a per-station

basis.

VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.

Hidden SSID Select this if you want tohide your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless clients in the

vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a potential connection.

Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway.

When a SSID is “hidden” and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect to

the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup screen(s)

(these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system).

Enable Intra-BSS

Traffic Blocking

Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID on the Zyxel Device.

Enable U-APSD Select this option to enable Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD), which is

also known as WMM-Power Save. This helps increase battery life for battery-powered wireless

clients connected to the Zyxel Device using this SSID profile.

Enable Proxy ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an IP address to a MAC

address. An ARP broadcast is sent to all devices in the same Ethernet network to request the

MAC address of a target IP address.

Select this option to allow the Zyxel Device to answer ARP requests for an IP address on behalf

of a client associated with this SSID. This can reduce broadcast traffic and improve network

performance.

802.11k/v Assisted

Roaming

Select this option to enable IEEE 802.11k/v assisted roaming on the Zyxel Device. When the

connected clients request 802.11k neighbor lists, the Zyxel Device will response with a list of

neighbor APs that can be candidates for roaming.

Schedule SSID Select this option and set whether the SSID is enabled or disabled on each day of the week.

You also need to select the hour and minute (in 24-hour format) to specify the time period of

each day during which the SSID is enabled/enabled.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

Table 57 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

142

Figure 83 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

13.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile

This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click

the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Note: This screen’s options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default

screen is displayed here.

Table 58 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new security profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected security profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected security profile.

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for example,

SSID profile).

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile.

Security Mode This field indicates this profile’s security mode (if any).

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

143

Figure 84 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

144

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

General Settings

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in

the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores

are allowed.

Security Mode Select a security mode from the list: none, enhanced-open, wep, wpa2, wpa2-mix or

wpa3.

enhanced-open uses Opportunistic Wireless Encryption (OWE) which encrypts the

wireless connection when possible.

Authentication Settings

Enterprise Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication with a RADIUS server.

ReAuthentication

Timer Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited

time.

Personal This field is available when you select the wpa2, wpa2-mix or wpa3 security mode.

Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) with WPA2 encryption or Simultaneous

Authentication of Equals (SAE) with WPA3 encryption.

Pre-Shared Key Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including

spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.

Transition Mode Enable this for backwards compatibility. This option is only available if the Security Mode

is wpa3 or enhanced-open. This creates two virtual APs (VAPs) with a primary (wpa3 or

enhanced-open) and fallback (wpa2 or none) security method.

If the Security Mode is wpa3, enabling this will force Management Frame Protection to be

set to Optional. If this is disabled or if the Security Mode is enhanced-open, Management

Frame Protection will be set to Required.

Cipher Type Select an encryption cipher type from the list.

auto — This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in

use by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection.

aes — This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more

recent development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients

may support this.

Idle Timeout Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is

discontinued.

Authentication Type Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Open or Share key.

Key Length Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections.

If you select WEP-64:

Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,

0x11AA22BB33) for each Key used.

or

Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for

example, MyKey) for each Key used.

If you select WEP-128:

Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,

0x00112233445566778899AABBCC) for each Key used.

or

Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for

example, MyKey12345678) for each Key used.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

145

Key 1~4 Based on your Key Length selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or ASCII

key.

Group Key Update

Timer

Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA2 encryption key.

Management Frame

Protection

This field is available only when you select wpa2 in the Security Mode field and set Cipher

Type to aes.

Data frames in 802.11 WLANs can be encrypted and authenticated with WEP, WPA or

WPA2. But 802.11 management frames, such as beacon/probe response, association

request, association response, de-authentication and disassociation are always

unauthenticated and unencrypted. IEEE 802.11w Protected Management Frames allows

APs to use the existing security mechanisms (encryption and authentication methods

defined in IEEE 802.11i WPA/WPA2) to protect management frames. This helps prevent

wireless DoS attacks.

Select the check box to enable management frame protection (MFP) to add security to

802.11 management frames.

Select Optional if you do not require the wireless clients to support MFP. Management

frames will be encrypted if the clients support MFP.

Select Required and wireless clients must support MFP in order to join the Zyxel Device’s

wireless network.

Radius Settings

Radius Server Type This shows External and the Zyxel Device uses an external RADIUS server for

authentication.

Primary / Secondary

Radius Server Activate

Select this to have the Zyxel Device use the specified RADIUS server.

Radius Server IP

Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.

Radius Server Port Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.

Radius Server Secret Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.

Primary / Secondary

Accounting Server

Activate

Select the check box to enable user accounting through an external authentication

server.

Accounting Server

IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.

Accounting Server

Port Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813.

You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so

with additional information.

Accounting Share

Secret Enter a password (up to 128 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between

the external accounting server and the Zyxel Device. The key must be the same on the

external accounting server and your Zyxel Device. The key is not sent over the network.

Accounting Interim

Update

This field is available only when you enable user accounting through an external

authentication server.

Select this to have the Zyxel Device send subscriber status updates to the accounting

server at the interval you specify.

Interim Update

Interval Specify the time interval for how often the Zyxel Device is to send a subscriber status

update to the accounting server.

General Server Settings

NAS IP Address If the RADIUS server requires the Zyxel Device to provide the NAS (Network Access Server)

IP address attribute, enter it here.

Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

146

13.5 MAC Filter List

This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. To

access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List.

Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the Zyxel Device.

Figure 85 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

13.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,

click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Note: Each MAC filtering profile can include a maximum of 512 MAC addresses.

NAS Identifier If the RADIUS server requires the Zyxel Device to provide the NAS (Network Access Server)

identifier attribute, enter it here. The NAS identifier is to identify the source of access

request. It could be the NAS’s fully qualified domain name.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 60 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for

example, SSID profile).

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile.

Filter Action This field indicates this profile’s filter action (if any).

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

147

Figure 86 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

13.6 Layer-2 Isolation List

Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent wireless clients associated with your Zyxel Device from

communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.

In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the Zyxel Device to allow a guest wireless client

(A) to access the main network router (B). The router provides access to the Internet and the network

printer (C) while preventing the client from accessing other computers and servers on the network. The

client can communicate with other wireless clients only if Intra-BSS Traffic blocking is disabled.

Table 61 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the

Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are

allowed.

Filter Action Select allow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect to the

network through the associated SSID; select deny to block the wireless clients with the specified

MAC addresses.

Add Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.

Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.

Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

MAC This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to

make it editable.

Description This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click

the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores

allowed.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

148

Note: Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking is activated when you enable layer-2 isolation.

Figure 87 Layer-2 Isolation Application

MAC addresses that are not listed in the layer-2 isolation table are blocked from communicating with

the Zyxel Device’s wireless clients except for broadcast packets. Layer-2 isolation does not check the

traffic between wireless clients that are associated with the same AP. Intra-BSS traffic allows wireless

clients associated with the same AP to communicate with each other.

This screen allows you to specify devices you want the users on your wireless networks to access. To

access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List.

Figure 88 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 62 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new layer-2 isolation profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected layer-2 isolation profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected layer-2 isolation profile.

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected layer-2 isolation profile (for

example, SSID profile).

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the layer-2 isolation profile.

Chapter 13 AP Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

149

13.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile

This screen allows you to create a new layer-2 isolation profile or edit an existing one. To access this

screen, click the Add button or select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list and click the Edit button.

Note: You need to know the MAC address of each wireless client, AP, computer or router that

you want to allow to communicate with the Zyxel Device’s wireless clients.

Figure 89 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation

Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 63 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation

Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the

Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are

allowed.

Add Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.

Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.

Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.

MAC This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to

make it editable.

Description This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click

the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores

allowed.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

150

CHAPTER 14

MON Profile

14.1 Overview

This screen allows you to set up monitor mode configurations that allow your Zyxel Device to scan for

other wireless devices in the vicinity. Once detected, you can use the Wireless > MON Mode screen

(Section 10.3 on page 109) to classify them as either rogue or friendly.

Not all Zyxel Devices support monitor mode and rogue APs detection.

14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The MON Profile screen (Section 14.2 on page 150) creates preset monitor mode configurations that can

be used by the Zyxel Device.

14.2 MON Profile

This screen allows you to create monitor mode configurations that can be used by the APs. To access

this screen, log into the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > MON Profile.

Figure 90 Configuration > Object > MON Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 64 Configuration > Object > MON Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new monitor mode profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected monitor mode profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected monitor mode profile.

Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

Chapter 14 MON Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

151

14.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile

This screen allows you to create a new monitor mode profile or edit an existing one. To access this

screen, click the Add button or select and existing monitor mode profile and click the Edit button. See

Section 1.2.3 on page 15 for more information about MON Mode.

Figure 91 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile

Object

Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected monitor mode profile (for

example, an AP management profile).

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.

Status This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor profile.

Table 64 Configuration > Object > MON Profile (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 14 MON Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

152

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 65 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Activate Select this to activate this monitor mode profile.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor mode profile.

Channel dwell time Enter the interval (in milliseconds) before the Zyxel Device switches to another channel for

monitoring.

Scan Channel Mode Select auto to have the Zyxel Device switch to the next sequential channel once the

Channel dwell time expires.

Select manual to set specific channels through which to cycle sequentially when the

Channel dwell time expires. Selecting this options makes the Scan Channel List options

available.

Set Scan Channel List

(2.4 GHz)

Select one or more than one channel to have the Zyxel Device using this profile scan the

channel(s) when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual.

These channels are limited to the 2.4 GHz range (802.11 b/g/n/ax).

Set Scan Channel List

(5 GHz)

Select one or more than one channel to have the Zyxel Device using this profile scan the

channel(s) when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual.

These channels are limited to the 5 GHz range (802.11 a/n/ac/ax). Not all Zyxel Devices

support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

153

CHAPTER 15

WDS Profile

15.1 Overview

This chapter shows you how to configure WDS (Wireless Distribution System) profiles for the Zyxel Device

to form a WDS with other APs.

15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The WDS Profile screen (Section 15.2 on page 153) creates preset WDS configurations that can be used

by the Zyxel Device.

15.2 WDS Profile

This screen allows you to manage and create WDS profiles that can be used by the APs. To access this

screen, click Configuration > Object > WDS Profile.

Figure 92 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 66 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a new profile.

Edit Click this to edit the selected profile.

Remove Click this to remove the selected profile.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the profile.

WDS SSID This field shows the SSID specified in this WDS profile.

Chapter 15 WDS Profile

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

154

15.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile

This screen allows you to create a new WDS profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the

Add button or select and existing profile and click the Edit button.

Figure 93 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 67 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name.

WDS SSID Enter the SSID with which you want the Zyxel Device to connect to a root AP or repeater to

form a WDS.

Pre-Shared Key Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including

spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.

The key is used to encrypt the traffic between the APs.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

155

CHAPTER 16

Certificates

16.1 Overview

The Zyxel Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are

based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.

Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.

16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The My Certifica tes screens (Section 16.2 on page 158) generate and export self-signed certificates or

certification requests and import the Zyxel Device’s CA-signed certificates.

The Trusted Certificates screens (Section 16.3 on page 165) save CA certificates and trusted remote

host certificates to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device trusts any valid certificate that you have

imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the certificates

that you have imported as a trusted certificate.

16.1.2 What You Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can

be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure.

These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as “digital

signatures”). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what your

signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone else. In the

same way, your private key “writes” your digital signature and your public key allows people to verify

whether data was signed by you, or by someone else.

This process works as follows:

1Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that the

message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public key pair

(one public key and one private key).

2Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who

receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him or not.

3Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny.

4Jenny receives the message and uses Tim’s public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is from

Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can have

altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tim’s private key).

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

156

5Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jenny’s public key to verify

the message.

The Zyxel Device uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to

establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The

method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the

type of connection.

The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification

authority’s public key to verify the certificates.

A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The

Zyxel Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.

Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A

directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL

(Certificate Revocation List). The Zyxel Device can check a peer’s certificate against a directory server’s

list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys

is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).

Advantages of Certificates

Certificates offer the following benefits.

The Zyxel Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to

trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.

Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never

need to transmit private keys.

Self-signed Certificates

You can have the Zyxel Device act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.

Factory Default Certificate

The Zyxel Device generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This certificate

is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate.

Certificate File Formats

Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.

PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase

letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.

Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures)

that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not

included. The Zyxel Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single

certificate.

PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters,

uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

157

Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key

in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not connected to

your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must

provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the Zyxel Device.

Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this

to occur since many programs use text files by default.

16.1.3 Verifying a Certificate

Before you import a trusted certificate into the Zyxel Device, you should verify that you have the correct

certificate. You can do this using the certificate’s fingerprint. A certificate’s fingerprint is a message

digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes how to check a

certificate’s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate.

1Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer.

2Make sure that the certificate has a “.cer” or “.crt” file name extension.

3Double-click the certificate’s icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down

to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.

4Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint

Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may vary based on your situation. Possible

examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

158

16.2 My Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates to open this screen. This is the Zyxel Device’s

summary list of certificates and certification requests.

Figure 94 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 68 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates

LABEL DESCRIPTION

PKI Storage Space

in Use

This bar displays the percentage of the Zyxel Device’s PKI storage space that is currently in use.

When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary

certificates before adding more certificates.

Add Click this to go to the screen where you can have the Zyxel Device generate a certificate or a

certification request.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of

information about the certificate.

Remove The Zyxel Device keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a

new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an

entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before

doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.

Object Reference You cannot delete certificates that any of the Zyxel Device’s features are configured to use.

Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use

the entry.

# This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.

Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give

each certificate a unique name.

Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is.

REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification

request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate

Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request.

SELF represents a self-signed certificate.

CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.

Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common

Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

159

16.2.1 Add My Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Add icon to open the Add My

Certificates screen. Use this screen to have the Zyxel Device create a self-signed certificate, enroll a

certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request.

Figure 95 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add

Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,

such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and

country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.

Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.

Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an

Expired! message if the certificate has expired.

Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the Zyxel Device.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates.

Table 68 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

160

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 69 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and

;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.

Subject Information Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do

not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a Host IP Address, Host Domain

Name, or E-Mail. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the

subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate

have unique subject information.

Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address, domain name or e-

mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail

address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification

purposes only and can be any string.

A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the

hyphen and periods.

An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the

hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore.

Organizational Unit Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You

can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the

underscore.

Organization Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to

31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.

Town (City) Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31

characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.

State (Province) Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31

characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.

Country Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31

characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.

Key Type The Zyxel Device uses the RSA (Rivest, Shamir and Adleman) public-key encryption

algorithm. SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) and SHA2 are hash algorithms used to

authenticate packet data. SHA2-256 or SHA2-512 are part of the SHA2 set of

cryptographic functions and they are considered even more secure than SHA1.

Select a key type from RSA-SHA256 and RSA-SHA512.

Key Length Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should

use (1024 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI

storage space.

Extended Key Usage Select Server Authentication to allow a web server to send clients the certificate to

authenticate itself.

Select Client Authentication to use the certificate’s key to authenticate clients to the

secure gateway.

These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.

Create a self-signed

certificate

Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate the certificate and act as the Certification

Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for

certificates.

Create a certification

request and save it

locally for later

manual enrollment

Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the

My Certificate Edit screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the

certification authority.

Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Edit screen and then send it to the

certification authority.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

161

If you configured the Add My Certificates screen to have the Zyxel Device enroll a certificate and the

certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the

Add My Certificates screen. Click Return and check your information in the Add My Certificates screen.

Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is

working properly if you want the Zyxel Device to enroll a certificate online.

16.2.2 Edit My Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Edit icon to open the My

Certificate Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the

certificate’s name.

Create a certification

request and enroll for

a certificate

immediately online

Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate a request for a certificate and apply to a

certification authority for a certificate.

You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted

Certificates screen.

When you select this option, you must select the certification authority’s enrollment

protocol and the certification authority’s certificate from the drop-down list boxes and

enter the certification authority’s server address. You also need to fill in the Reference

Number and Key if the certification authority requires them.

Enrollment Protocol This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate

immediately online. Select the certification authority’s enrollment protocol from the drop-

down list box.

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was

developed by VeriSign and Cisco.

Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was

developed by the Public Key Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet

Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510.

CA Server Address This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate

immediately online. Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification authority server.

For a URL, you can use up to 511 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9′()+,/:.=?;!*#@$_%-

CA Certificate This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate

immediately online. Select the certification authority’s certificate from the CA Certificate

drop-down list box.

You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted

Certificates screen. Click Trusted CAs to go to the Trusted Certificates screen where you

can view (and manage) the Zyxel Device’s list of certificates of trusted certification

authorities.

Request

Authentication

When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately

online, the certification authority may want you to include a reference number and key to

identify you when you send a certification request.

Fill in both the Reference Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses the

CMP enrollment protocol. Just the Key field displays if your certification authority uses the

SCEP enrollment protocol.

For the reference number, use 0 to 99999999.

For the key, use up to 31 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9;|`~!@#$%^&*()_+\{}’:,./

<>=-

OK Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation.

Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

Table 69 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

162

Figure 96 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

163

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 70 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric

and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.

Certification Path This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request.

Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification

authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself).

If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification

authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself).

If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The

Zyxel Device does not trust the certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any

certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path.

Certificate

Information

These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.

Type This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a

Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner

signed the certificate (not a certification authority). “X.509” means that this certificate was

created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats

for public-key certificates.

Version This field displays the X.509 version number. “

Serial Number This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority

or generated by the Zyxel Device.

Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common

Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and Country (C).

Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,

such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.

With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field.

“none” displays for a certification request.

Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate.

Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. “none” displays for a

certification request.

Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes

an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. “none” displays for a certification

request.

Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair

(the Zyxel Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for

example).

Subject Alternative

Name

This field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail

address (EMAIL).

Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,

“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and

“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.

Extended Key Usage This field displays for what EKU (Extended Key Usage) functions the certificate’s key can be

used.

Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA

means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1”

means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path. This field

does not display for a certification request.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

164

16.2.3 Import Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import to open the My Certificate Import

screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the Zyxel Device.

Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that

was generated by the Zyxel Device. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12

format, including the certificate’s public and private keys.

The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen.

You must remove any spaces in the certificate’s filename before you can import it.

MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the MD5

algorithm.

SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the SHA1

algorithm.

Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded

Format

This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced

Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a

binary certificate into a printable form.

You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority’s web page,

an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a

management computer for later manual enrollment.

You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you

can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management

computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).

Export Certificate

Only

Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button and

then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location

that you want to use and click Save.

Password If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it here.

Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you import the

certificate to another device.

Export Certificate

with Private Key

Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the certificate’s

password and click this button. Click Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen

opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. You can only change the name.

Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

Table 70 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

165

Figure 97 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

16.3 Trusted Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates to open the Trusted Certificates screen.

This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the Zyxel Device to accept as trusted.

The Zyxel Device also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on this list as being

trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certificates.

Table 71 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the Zyxel

Device.

Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.

Password This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the file’s password that was

created when the PKCS #12 file was exported.

OK Click OK to save the certificate on the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

166

Figure 98 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

16.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certifica tes and then a certificate’s Edit icon to open

the Trusted Certificates Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate,

change the certificate’s name and set whether or not you want the Zyxel Device to check a

Table 72 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates

LABEL DESCRIPTION

PKI Storage Space

in Use

This bar displays the percentage of the Zyxel Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use.

When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary

certificates before adding more certificates.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of

information about the certificate.

Remove The Zyxel Device keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a

new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an

entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before

doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.

Object Reference You cannot delete certificates that any of the Zyxel Device’s features are configured to use.

Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the

entry.

# This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.

Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.

Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common

Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,

such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and

country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.

Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.

Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an

Expired! message if the certificate has expired.

Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority

that you trust, from your computer to the Zyxel Device.

Refresh Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

167

certification authority’s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification

authority.

Figure 99 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

168

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 73 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You

can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.

Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s certificate

and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification

authorities that validate the end entity’s certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one

that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be the only certification authority in

the list (along with the end entity’s own certificate). The Zyxel Device does not trust the end

entity’s certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has

expired or been revoked.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path.

Enable X.509v3 CRL

Distribution Points

and OCSP checking

Select this check box to have the Zyxel Device check incoming certificates that are signed

by this certificate against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or an OCSP server. You also

need to configure the OSCP or LDAP server details.

OCSP Server Select this check box if the directory server uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol).

URL Type the protocol, IP address and pathname of the OCSP server.

ID The Zyxel Device may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the OCSP server. Type

the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server (usually a

certification authority).

Password Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the OCSP server

(usually a certification authority).

LDAP Server Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access

Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of

certificates and lists of revoked certificates.

Address Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server.

Port Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server port

number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for LDAP.

ID The Zyxel Device may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory server.

Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server

(usually a certification authority).

Password Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL directory

server (usually a certification authority).

Certificate

Information

These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.

Type This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a

Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner

signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was

created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats

for public-key certificates.

Version This field displays the X.509 version number.

Serial Number This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority.

Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common

Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).

Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,

such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.

With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field.

Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some

certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and

the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA

public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

169

16.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates

Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import to open the Import Trusted

Certificates screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certificate to the Zyxel Device.

Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the

certificate.

Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red

and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes

an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair

(the Zyxel Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for

example).

Subject Alternative

Name

This field displays the certificate’s owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail

address (EMAIL).

Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,

“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and

“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.

Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA

means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1”

means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path.

MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the MD5

algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for

example) that this is actually their certificate.

SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the SHA1

algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for

example) that this is actually their certificate.

Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced

Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a

binary certificate into a printable form.

You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or

you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a

management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).

Export Certificate Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens,

browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. You can only change the name.

Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Certificates screen.

Table 73 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 16 Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

170

Figure 100 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

16.4 Technical Reference

The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this

chapter.

OCSP

OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) allows an application or device to check whether a certificate

is valid. With OCSP the Zyxel Device checks the status of individual certificates instead of downloading a

Certificate Revocation List (CRL). OCSP has two main advantages over a CRL. The first is real-time status

information. The second is a reduction in network traffic since the Zyxel Device only gets information on

the certificates that it needs to verify, not a huge list. When the Zyxel Device requests certificate status

information, the OCSP server returns a “expired”, “current” or “unknown” response.

Table 74 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the Zyxel

Device.

Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.

OK Click OK to save the certificate on the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the previous screen.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

171

CHAPTER 17

System

17.1 Overview

Use the system screens to configure general Zyxel Device settings.

17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

•The Host Name screen (Section 17.2 on page 171) configures a unique name for the Zyxel Device in

your network.

The Power Mode screen (Section 17.3 on page 172) configures the Zyxel Device’s power settings.

The Date/Time screen (Section 17.4 on page 173) configures the date and time for the Zyxel Device.

The WWW screens (Section 17.5 on page 176) configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to the Zyxel

Device.

The SSH screen (Section 17.6 on page 184) configures SSH (Secure SHell) for securely accessing the

Zyxel Device’s command line interface.

The Telnet screen (Section 17.7 on page 188) configures Telnet for accessing the Zyxel Device’s

command line interface.

•The FTP screen (Section 17.8 on page 189) specifies FTP server settings. You can upload and

download the Zyxel Device’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. Please also see Chapter 19 on

page 206 for more information about firmware and configuration files.

The SNMP screens (Section 17.9 on page 190) configure the Zyxel Device’s SNMP settings, including

profiles that define allowed SNMPv3 access.

17.2 Host Name

A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Configuration > System

> Host Name to open this screen.

Figure 101 Configuration > System > Host Name

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

172

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.3 Power Mode

Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Device’s power settings. Click Configuration > System > Power

Mode to open this screen.

Figure 102 Configuration > System > Power Mode

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 75 Configuration > System > Host Name

LABEL DESCRIPTION

System Name Choose a descriptive name to identify your Zyxel Device device. This name can be up to 64

alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (_) and

periods (.) are accepted.

System Location Specify the name of the place where the Zyxel Device is located. You can enter up to 60

alphanumeric and ‘()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$%@ characters. Spaces and underscores are allowed. The

name should start with a letter.

Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients

connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254

alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” are accepted.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 76 Configuration > System > Power Mode

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Force override

the power mode

to full power

Select this check box if you are using a PoE injector that does not support PoE negotiation.

Otherwise, the Zyxel Device cannot draw full power from the power sourcing equipment.

Enable this power mode to improve the Zyxel Device’s performance in this situation.

Note: Ensure that the power sourcing equipment can supply enough power to the

AP to avoid abnormal system reboots.

Note: Only enable this if you are using a passive PoE injector that is not IEEE 802.3at/bt

compliant but can still provide full power.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

173

17.4 Date and Time

For effective scheduling and logging, the Zyxel Device system time must be accurate. The Zyxel Device

has a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external

server.

To change your Zyxel Device’s time based on your local time zone and date, click Configuration >

System > Date/Time. The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the Zyxel Device’s time and

date or have the Zyxel Device get the date and time from a time server.

Figure 103 Configuration > System > Date/Time

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 77 Configuration > System > Date/Time

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Current Time and Date

Current Time This field displays the present time of your Zyxel Device.

Current Date This field displays the present date of your Zyxel Device.

Time and Date Setup

Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time

and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight

saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings

manually, the Zyxel Device uses the new setting once you click Apply.

New Time

(hh:mm:ss)

This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured

manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click

Apply.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

174

New Date

(yyyy-mm-dd)

This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured

manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click

Apply.

Get from Time

Server

Select this radio button to have the Zyxel Device get the time and date from the time server

you specify below. The Zyxel Device requests time and date settings from the time server

under the following circumstances.

When the Zyxel Device starts up.

When you click Apply or Sync. Now in this screen.

24-hour intervals after starting up.

Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if

you are unsure of this information.

Sync. Now Click this button to have the Zyxel Device get the time and date from a time server (see the

Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight saving settings).

Time Zone Setup

Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time

zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Enable Daylight

Saving

Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks

ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.

Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.

Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight

Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of

March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local

time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the at

field.

Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time

zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M.

GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you

type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2

because Germany’s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight

Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time

zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the

United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the at field.

Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the

time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1

A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The

time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would

type 2 because Germany’s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Offset Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends.

Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).

For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will

appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 77 Configuration > System > Date/Time (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

175

17.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List

When you turn on the Zyxel Device for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01 00:00:00. The

Zyxel Device then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of Network Time

Protocol (NTP) time servers.

The Zyxel Device continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not specify a

time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified.

When the Zyxel Device uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and

tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the Zyxel Device goes through the rest of the

list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP time servers have

been tried.

17.4.2 Time Server Synchronization

Click the Sync. Now button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the Time

Server Address field.

When the Loading message appears, you may have to wait up to one minute.

Figure 104 Loading

The Current Time and Current Date fields will display the appropriate settings if the synchronization is

successful.

If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the View Log screen. Try re-configuring the

Date/Time screen.

To manually set the Zyxel Device date and time:

1Click System > Date/Time.

2Select Manual under Time and Date Setup.

3Enter the Zyxel Device’s time in the New Time field.

4Enter the Zyxel Device’s date in the New Date field.

5Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.

6As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the Zyxel Device clock for

daylight savings.

7Click Apply.

Table 78 Default Time Servers

0.pool.ntp.org

1.pool.ntp.org

2.pool.ntp.org

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

176

To get the Zyxel Device date and time from a time server:

1Click System > Date/Time.

2Select Get from Time Server under Time and Date Setup.

3Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.

4Under Time and Date Setup, enter a Time Server Address.

5Click Apply.

17.5 WWW Overview

The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the Zyxel Device coming in from the

WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP, Telnet, and FTP management access are not secure.

Figure 105 Secure and Insecure Service Access From the WAN

17.5.1 Service Access Limitations

A service cannot be used to access the Zyxel Device when you have disabled that service in the

corresponding screen.

17.5.2 System Timeout

There is a lease timeout for administrators. The Zyxel Device automatically logs you out if the

management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does

not time out when a statistics screen is polling.

Each user is also forced to log in the Zyxel Device for authentication again when the reauthentication

time expires.

You can change the timeout settings in the User screens.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

177

17.5.3 HTTPS

You can set the Zyxel Device to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator sessions.

HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that

encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that

enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the

transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if

data has been changed).

It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 16 on page 155 for more

information).

HTTPS on the Zyxel Device is used so that you can securely access the Zyxel Device using the Web

Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the Zyxel Device) must always

authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Zyxel

Device), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server requires it to do

so (select Authenticate Client Certificates in the WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is

optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the Zyxel Device a certificate. You must apply

for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Zyxel Device.

Please refer to the following figure.

1HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the Zyxel

Device’s web server.

2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Zyxel Device’s web

server.

Figure 106 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation

Note: If you disable HTTP in the WWW screen, then the Zyxel Device blocks all HTTP connection

attempts.

17.5.4 Configuring WWW Service Control

Click Configuration > System > WWW to open the WWW screen. Use this screen to specify HTTP or HTTPS

settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

178

Figure 107 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.5.5 HTTPS Example

If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the Zyxel Device, then in your browser enter “https://

Zyxel Device IP Address/” as the web site address where “Zyxel Device IP Address” is the IP address or

domain name of the Zyxel Device you wish to access.

Table 79 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control

LABEL DESCRIPTION

HTTPS

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches

the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device Web

Configurator using secure HTTPs connections.

Server Port The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port to a

different number on the Zyxel Device, for example 8443, then you must notify people who

need to access the Zyxel Device Web Configurator to use “https://Zyxel Device IP

Address:8443” as the URL.

Authenticate Client

Certificates

Select Authenticate Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate

itself to the Zyxel Device by sending the Zyxel Device a certificate. To do that the SSL client

must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on

the Zyxel Device.

Server Certificate Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Zyxel Device) uses to authenticate itself to the

HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen.

Redirect HTTP to HTTPS To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP connection

requests to the HTTPS server.

HTTP

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches

the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device Web

Configurator using HTTP connections.

Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use

the same port number in order to use that service to access the Zyxel Device.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

179

17.5.5.1 Google Chrome Warning Messages

When you attempt to access the Zyxel Device HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in the

following screen.

Figure 108 Security Alert Dialog Box (Google Chrome)

Select Advanced > Proceed to 192.168.1.2 (unsafe) to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen.

17.5.5.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages

When you attempt to access the Zyxel Device HTTPS server, a Warning screen appears as shown in the

following screen. Click Learn More… if you want to verify more information about the certificate from the

Zyxel Device.

Click Advanced > Accept the Risk and Continue.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

180

Figure 109 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox)

17.5.5.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages

Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the Zyxel Device’s HTTPS server

certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:

The issuing certificate authority of the Zyxel Device’s HTTPS server certificate is not one of the browser’s

trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the Zyxel Device’s factory default

certificate is the Zyxel Device itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate.

For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating

system as a trusted certificate.

To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate

authority’s certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. Refer to Appendix A on

page 249 for details.

17.5.5.4 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates

The SSL client needs a certificate if Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the Zyxel Device.

You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the Zyxel Device in order for the Authenticate Client

Certificates to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details).

Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the Zyxel Device (see the

Zyxel Device’s Trusted Certificates Web Configurator screen).

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

181

Figure 110 Trusted Certificates

The CA sends you a package containing the CA’s trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s) and

a password to install the personal certificate(s).

17.5.5.5 Installing a Personal Certificate

You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it during

the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a screen similar

to the one shown next.

1Click Next to begin the wizard.

2The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File

name text box. Click Browse if you wish to import a different certificate.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

182

3Enter the password given to you by the CA.

4Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Place all

certificates in the following store and choose a different location.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

183

5Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process.

6You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer.

17.5.5.6 Using a Certificate When Accessing the Zyxel Device

To access the Zyxel Device via HTTPS:

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

184

1Enter ‘https://Zyxel Device IP Address/’ in your browser’s web address field.

2When Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the Zyxel Device, the following screen asks you to

select a personal certificate to send to the Zyxel Device. This screen displays even if you only have a

single certificate as in the example.

3You next see the Web Configurator login screen.

17.6 SSH

You can use SSH (Secure SHell) to securely access the Zyxel Device’s command line interface.

SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide

secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the following

figure, computer B on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the Zyxel Device (A) for a

management session.

Figure 111 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

185

17.6.1 How SSH Works

The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts

using SSH v1.

Figure 112 How SSH v1 Works Example

1Host Identification

The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key.

The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the

result back to the server.

The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server

public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.

2Encryption Method

Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption

method to use.

3Authentication and Data Transmission

After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established

between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name

and password) to the server to log in to the server.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

186

17.6.2 SSH Implementation on the Zyxel Device

Your Zyxel Device supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption methods

(AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Zyxel Device for management

using port 22 (by default).

17.6.3 Requirements for Using SSH

You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is

used to connect to the Zyxel Device over SSH.

17.6.4 Configuring SSH

Click Configuration > System > SSH to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your Zyxel

Device’s Secure Shell settings.

Note: It is recommended that you disable Telnet and FTP when you configure SSH for secure

connections.

Figure 113 Configuration > System > SSH

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 80 Configuration > System > SSH

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP

address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device CLI using this service.

Note: The Zyxel Device uses only SSH version 2 protocol.

Version 1 Select the check box to have the Zyxel Device use both SSH version 1 and version 2 protocols. If

you clear the check box, the Zyxel Device uses only SSH version 2 protocol.

Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the

same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the Zyxel Device

for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates

screen.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

187

17.6.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH

This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client

program to remotely access the Zyxel Device. The configuration and connection steps are similar for

most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.

17.6.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows

This section describes how to access the Zyxel Device using the Secure Shell Client program.

1Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the Zyxel

Device.

2Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 2.

3A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Yes to continue.

Figure 114 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key

Enter the password to log in to the Zyxel Device. The CLI screen displays next.

17.6.5.2 Example 2: Linux

This section describes how to access the Zyxel Device using the OpenSSH client program that comes

with most Linux distributions.

1Test whether the SSH service is available on the Zyxel Device.

Enter “telnet 192.168.1.2 22” at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer attempts to

connect to port 22 on the Zyxel Device (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.2).

A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the Zyxel Device.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

188

Figure 115 SSH Example 2: Test

2Enter “ssh –2 192.168.1.2”. This command forces your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device

using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the Zyxel Device using SSH, a message

displays prompting you to save the host information of the Zyxel Device. Type “yes” and press [ENTER].

Then enter the password to log in to the Zyxel Device.

Figure 116 SSH Example 2: Log in

3The CLI screen displays next.

17.7 Telnet

You can use Telnet to access the Zyxel Device’s command line interface. Click Configuration > System >

TELNET to configure your Zyxel Device for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to enable or disable

Telnet and set the server port number.

Figure 117 Configuration > System > TELNET

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

$ telnet 192.168.1.2 22

Trying 192.168.1.2…

Connected to 192.168.1.2.

Escape character is ‘^]’.

SSH-1.5-1.0.0

$ ssh –2 192.168.1.2

The authenticity of host ‘192.168.1.2 (192.168.1.2)’ can’t be established.

RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.

Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes

Warning: Permanently added ‘192.168.1.2′ (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.

Administrator@192.168.1.2’s password:

Table 81 Configuration > System > TELNET

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP

address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device CLI using this service.

Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the

same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

189

17.8 FTP

You can upload and download the Zyxel Device’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this

feature, your computer must have an FTP client. See Chapter 19 on page 206 for more information

about firmware and configuration files.

To change your Zyxel Device’s FTP settings, click Configuration > System > FTP tab. The screen appears

as shown. Use this screen to specify FTP settings.

Figure 118 Configuration > System > FTP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 81 Configuration > System > TELNET (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 82 Configuration > System > FTP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP

address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device using this service.

TLS required Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt communication.

This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers.

Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the

same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the Zyxel Device

for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates

screen.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

190

17.9 SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information

between network devices. Your Zyxel Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a

manager station to manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through the network. The Zyxel Device

supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1), version two (SNMPv2c), and version three (SNMPv3). The next

figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.

Figure 119 SNMP Management Model

An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.

An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Zyxel Device). An

agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible

with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network

management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.

The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of

information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets

received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed

objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these

objects.

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager

issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get — Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.

GetNext — Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent.

In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get

operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.

Set — Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

191

Trap — Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.

17.9.1 Supported MIBs

The Zyxel Device supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The Zyxel Device also supports

private MIBs (ZYXEL-ES-CAPWAP.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-COMMON.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-ZyXELAPMgmt.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-

PROWLAN.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-RFMGMT.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-SMI.MIB, and ZYXEL-ES-WIRELESS.MIB) to collect

information about CPU and memory usage and VPN total throughput. The focus of the MIBs is to let

administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. You can download the Zyxel

Device’s MIBs from www.zyxel.com.

17.9.2 SNMP Traps

The Zyxel Device will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs.

17.9.3 Configuring SNMP

To change your Zyxel Device’s SNMP settings, click Configuration > System > SNMP tab. The screen

appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings. You can also configure user profiles

that define allowed SNMPv3 access.

Figure 120 Configuration > System > SNMP

Table 83 SNMP Traps

OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION

linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.

linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.

authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-

authenticated hosts.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

192

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.9.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile

This screen allows you to add or edit an SNMPv3 user profile. To access this screen, click the

Configuration > System > SNMP screen’s Add button or select a SNMPv3 user profile from the list and

click the Edit button.

Table 84 Configuration > System > SNMP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow users to access the Zyxel Device using SNMP.

Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the

same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Trap

Community Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.

The default is public and allows all requests.

Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.

Trap Wireless

Event

Select this to have the Zyxel Device send a trap to the SNMP manager when a wireless client is

connected to or disconnected from the Zyxel Device.

SNMPv2c Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv2c to access the Zyxel Device.

Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests

from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.

Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the

management station. The default is private and allows all requests.

SNMPv3 Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv3 to access the Zyxel Device.

Add Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the

selected entry.

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry’s settings.

Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove

it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.

#This the index number of an SNMPv3 user profile.

User Name This is the name of the user for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.

Authentication This field displays the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel

Device using this SNMPv3 user profile.

Privacy This field displays the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel

Device using this SNMPv3 user profile.

Privilege This field displays whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to

the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 17 System

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

193

Figure 121 Configuration > System > SNMP > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 85 Configuration > System > SNMP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

User Name Select the user name of the user account for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.

Authentication Select the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device

using this SNMPv3 user profile.

Select MD5 to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by MD5 for authentication.

Select SHA to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by SHA for authentication.

Privacy Select the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device using

this SNMPv3 user profile.

Select NONE to not encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.

Select DES to use DES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.

Select AES to use AES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.

Privilege Select whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to the Zyxel

Device using this SNMPv3 user profile.

OK Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

194

CHAPTER 18

Log and Report

18.1 Overview

Use the system screens to configure daily reporting and log settings.

18.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter

The Email Daily Report screen (Section 18.2 on page 194) configures how and where to send daily

reports and what reports to send.

The Log Setting screens (Section 18.3 on page 196) specify which logs are e-mailed, where they are e-

mailed, and how often they are e-mailed.

18.2 Email Daily Report

Use this screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing through

your Zyxel Device.

Note: Data collection may decrease the Zyxel Device’s traffic throughput rate.

Click Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report to display the following screen. Configure this

screen to have the Zyxel Device e-mail you system statistics every day.

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

195

Figure 122 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 86 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Email

Daily Report

Select this to send reports by e-mail every day.

Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

196

18.3 Log Setting

These screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing (for

example, in the Monitor > View Log screen) or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is e-mailed

immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as system errors

and attacks.

The Zyxel Device provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. The

system log is available on the View Log screen, the e-mail profiles are used to mail log messages to the

specified destinations, and the other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers.

The Log Setting tab also controls what information is saved in each log. For the system log, you can also

specify which log messages are e-mailed, where they are e-mailed, and how often they are e-mailed.

For alerts, the Log Setting screen controls which events generate alerts and where alerts are e-mailed.

The Log Setting screen provides a summary of all the settings. You can use the Edit Log Setting screen to

maintain the detailed settings (such as log categories, e-mail addresses, server names, etc.) for any log.

SSL/TLS

Encryption

Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want

encrypted communications between the mail server and the Zyxel Device.

Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS.

Select No to not encrypt the communications.

Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic.

Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the Zyxel

Device’s system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the Zyxel Device’s

system date and time to the subject.

Mail From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in

replies.

Mail To Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.

SMTP

Authentication

Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server.

User Name This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to

provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.

Password This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to

provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.

Send Report

Now

Click this button to have the Zyxel Device send the daily e-mail report immediately.

Time for sending

report

Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.

Report Items Select the information to include in the report. Select Reset counters after sending report

successfully if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period.

Reset All

Counters

Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Table 86 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

197

Alternatively, if you want to edit what events is included in each log, you can also use the Active Log

Summary screen to edit this information for all logs at the same time.

18.3.1 Log Setting Screen

To access this screen, click Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting.

Figure 123 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 87 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the

entry’s settings.

Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.

Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log.

Status This field shows whether the log is active or not.

Name This field displays the name of the log (system log or one of the remote servers).

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

198

18.3.2 Edit System Log Settings

This screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail

profiles). Select a system log entry in the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon.

Log Format This field displays the format of the log.

Internal — system log; you can view the log on the View Log tab.

VRPT/Syslog — Zyxel’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.

CEF/Syslog — Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.

Summary This field is a summary of the settings for each log.

Active Log

Summary

Click this button to open the Active Log Summary screen.

Apply Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take

effect.

Table 87 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

199

Figure 124 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

200

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 88 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

E-Mail Server 1/2

Active Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this section.

You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and what kinds of

log messages are included in alerts in the Active Log and Alert section.

Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.

SSL/TLS Encryption Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you

want encrypted communications between the mail server and the Zyxel Device.

Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS.

Select No to not encrypt the communications.

Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic.

Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select App e nd system name to add the

Zyxel Device’s system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the Zyxel

Device’s system date and time to the subject.

Send From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used

in replies.

Send Log To Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.

Send Alerts To Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered.

Sending Log Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: When Full, Hourly and When

Full, Daily and When Full, and Weekly and When Full.

Day for Sending Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log is e-

mailed.

Time for Sending

Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day (hours

and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.

SMTP

Authentication Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP

server.

User Name This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user

name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.

Password This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the

password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.

Active Log and Alert

System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information for any category for the system log or

e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — create log messages and alerts for all

categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the

Zyxel Device will e-mail logs to them.

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — create log messages, alerts,

and debugging information for all categories. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail

debugging information, even if this setting is selected.

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

201

E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail

server 1 for all log categories.

Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1

settings.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail

server 1.

enable alert logs (red exclamation point) — e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server

1.

E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail

server 2 for all log categories.

Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2

settings.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail

server 2.

enable alert logs (red exclamation point) — e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server

2.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.

Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display

and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging

messages generated by open source software.

System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information from this category

enable normal logs (green check mark) — create log messages and alerts from this

category

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — create log messages, alerts,

and debugging information from this category; the Zyxel Device does not e-mail

debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected.

E-mail Server 1 Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it

is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail

settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging

information, even if it is recorded in the System log.

E-mail Server 2 Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail

settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging

information, even if it is recorded in the System log.

Log Consolidation

Active Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log

messages that arrive within the specified Log Consolidation Interval. In the View Log tab,

the text “[count=x]”, where x is the number of original log messages, is appended at the

end of the Message field, when multiple log messages were aggregated.

Log Consolidation

Interval Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message

appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text “[count=x]”,

where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of the Message

field.

OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

Table 88 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

202

18.3.3 Edit Remote Server

This screen controls the settings for each log in the remote server (syslog). Select a remote server entry in

the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon.

Figure 125 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

203

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

18.3.4 Active Log Summary

This screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, e-mail profiles,

and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for example, where

and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this screen, go to the Log

Setting screen, and click the Active Log Summary button.

Table 89 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Log Settings for Remote Server

Active Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section. You

specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Active Log section.

Log Format This field displays the format of the log information. It is read-only.

VRPT/Syslog — Zyxel’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.

CEF/Syslog — Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.

Server

Address Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log information.

Log Facility Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog

server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information.

Active Log

Selection Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.

disable all logs (red X) — do not send the remote server logs for any log category.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — send the remote server log messages and alerts for all

log categories.

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — send the remote server log

messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.

Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and

Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages

generated by open source software.

Selection Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below).

Choices are:

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information from this category

enable normal logs (green checkmark) — log regular information and alerts from this category

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — log regular information, alerts, and

debugging information from this category

OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

204

Figure 126 Active Log Summary

This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included in

each log and each alert. (The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open

source software.)

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 90 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Active Log

Summary

If the Zyxel Device is set to controller mode, the AC section controls logs generated by the

controller and the AP section controls logs generated by the managed APs.

System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail

any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — create log messages and alerts for all categories for

the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the Zyxel Device will e-mail

logs to them.

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — create log messages, alerts, and

debugging information for all categories. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging

information, even if this setting is selected.

Chapter 18 Log and Report

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

205

E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server

1 for all log categories.

Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server

1.

enable alert logs (red exclamation point) — e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1.

E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server

2 for all log categories.

Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server

2.

enable alert logs (red exclamation point) — e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2.

Remote Server

1~4

For each remote server, use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the

log categories.

disable all logs (red X) — do not send the remote server logs for any log category.

enable normal logs (green check mark) — send the remote server log messages and alerts for all

log categories.

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — send the remote server log

messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.

Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and

Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages

generated by open source software.

System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information from this category

enable normal logs (green checkmark) — create log messages and alerts from this category

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — create log messages, alerts, and

debugging information from this category; the Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging

information, however, even if this setting is selected.

E-mail Server 1 E-

mail

Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings

specified in E-Mail Server 1. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it

is recorded in the System log.

E-mail Server 2 E-

mail

Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings

specified in E-Mail Server 2. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it

is recorded in the System log.

Remote Server

1~4 Syslog

For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Category

(except All Logs; see below). Choices are:

disable all logs (red X) — do not log any information from this category

enable normal logs (green checkmark) — log regular information and alerts from this category

enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) — log regular information, alerts, and

debugging information from this category

OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.

Table 90 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

206

CHAPTER 19

File Manager

19.1 Overview

Configuration files define the Zyxel Device’s settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can

store on the Zyxel Device and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a shell

script without the Zyxel Device restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell script files

on the Zyxel Device. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and upload them to

the Zyxel Device. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh extension.

19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Configuration File screen (Section 19.2 on page 207) stores and names configuration files. You

can also download and upload configuration files.

The Firmware Package screen (Section 19.3 on page 212) checks your current firmware version and

uploads firmware to the Zyxel Device.

The Shell Script screen (Section 19.4 on page 214) stores, names, downloads, uploads and runs shell

script files.

19.1.2 What you Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.

Configuration Files and Shell Scripts

When you apply a configuration file, the Zyxel Device uses the factory default settings for any features

that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the Zyxel Device only applies the

commands that it contains. Other settings do not change.

These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands manually. An

example is shown below.

Figure 127 Configuration File / Shell Script: Example

# enter configuration mode

configure terminal

# change administrator password

username admin password 4321 user-type admin

#configure default radio profile, change 2GHz channel to 11 & Tx output

power # to 50%

wlan-radio-profile default

2g-channel 11

output-power 50%

exit

write

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

207

While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the Zyxel Device applies configuration

files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below.

You have to run the aforementioned example as a shell script because the first command is run in

Privilege mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration file

because the rest of the commands are executed in Configuration mode.

Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts

In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to have the

Zyxel Device treat the line as a comment.

Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!” to have

the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode.

Note: “exit” or “!’” must follow sub commands if it is to make the Zyxel Device exit sub

command mode.

In the following example lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 7 exits sub command mode.

Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts

When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the Zyxel Device processes the file line-by-line.

The Zyxel Device checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it continues with

the next line. If the Zyxel Device finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file or shell script and

generates a log.

You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-on-error

off in the configuration file or shell script. The Zyxel Device ignores any errors in the configuration file or

shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The Zyxel Device still generates a log for any errors.

19.2 Configuration File

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File to open this screen. Use the Configuration File

screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the

Zyxel Device to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the Zyxel Device.

Table 91 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the Zyxel Device

Configuration Files (.conf) Shell Scripts (.zysh)

Resets to default configuration.

•Goes into CLI Configuration mode.

Runs the commands in the configuration file.

•Goes into CLI Privilege mode.

Runs the commands in the shell script.

! this is from Joe

# on 2010/12/05

wlan-ssid-profile default

ssid Joe-AP

qos wmm

security default

!

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

208

Once your Zyxel Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back

up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup configuration file

will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.

Configuration File Flow at Restart

If there is not a startup-config.conf when you restart the Zyxel Device (whether through a

management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the Zyxel Device uses the

system-default.conf configuration file with the Zyxel Device’s default settings.

•If there is a startup-config.conf, the Zyxel Device checks it for errors and applies it. If there are no

errors, the Zyxel Device uses it and copies it to the lastgood.conf configuration file as a back up file. If

there is an error, the Zyxel Device generates a log and copies the startup-config.conf configuration

file to the startup-config-bad.conf configuration file and tries the existing lastgood.conf configuration

file. If there isn’t a lastgood.conf configuration file or it also has an error, the Zyxel Device applies the

system-default.conf configuration file.

You can change the way the startup-config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup stop-

on-error off command. The Zyxel Device ignores any errors in the startup-config.conf file and

applies all of the valid commands. The Zyxel Device still generates a log for any errors.

Figure 128 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File

Do not turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in

progress.

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

209

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Rename Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the Zyxel Device. You can only

rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the lastgood.conf, system-

default.conf and startup-config.conf files.

You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the Zyxel

Device.

Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.

Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of

the configuration file.

Remove Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Remove to delete it from the Zyxel Device.

You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the system-

default.conf, startup-config.conf and lastgood.conf files.

A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click OK

to delete the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the

configuration file.

Download Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your

computer.

Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the Zyxel Device.

Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.

Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of

the configuration file.

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

210

Apply Use this button to have the Zyxel Device use a specific configuration file.

Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Apply to have the Zyxel Device use that

configuration file. The Zyxel Device does not have to restart in order to use a different

configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system

reconfigures.

The following screen gives you options for what the Zyxel Device is to do if it encounters an error

in the configuration file.

Immediately stop applying the configuration file — this is not recommended because it would

leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured before the first

error, the console port may be the only way to access the Zyxel Device.

Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration

this gets the Zyxel Device started with a fully valid configuration file as quickly as possible.

Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file — this applies the valid parts of the

configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration file’s errors. This lets the

Zyxel Device apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for what to fix.

Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous

configuration — this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates error logs for all of

the configuration file’s errors, and starts the Zyxel Device with a fully valid configuration file.

Click OK to have the Zyxel Device start applying the configuration file or click Cancel to close

the screen

#This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential value,

and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration files that you

can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available flash storage space.

File Name This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file.

You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names.

The system-default.conf file contains the Zyxel Device’s default settings. Select this file and click

Apply to reset all of the Zyxel Device settings to the factory defaults. This configuration file is

included when you upload a firmware package.

The startup-config.conf file is the configuration file that the Zyxel Device is currently using. If you

make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied to this

configuration file. The Zyxel Device applies configuration changes made in the Web

Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration

changes made via commands when you use the write command.

The lastgood.conf is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when the

Zyxel Device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can

apply lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration.

Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file.

Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

211

19.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP

The following example gets a configuration file named startup-config.conf from the Zyxel Device and

saves it on the computer.

1Connect your computer to the Zyxel Device.

2The FTP server IP address of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer to

use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.

3Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device. For example, in the Windows

command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when

the firmware recovery finishes.

4Enter your user name when prompted.

5Enter your password as requested.

6Use “cd” to change to the directory that contains the files you want to download.

7Use “dir” or “ls” if you need to display a list of the files in the directory.

8Use «get” to download files. Transfer the configuration file on the Zyxel Device to your computer. Type

get followed by the name of the configuration file. This examples uses get startup-config.conf.

Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last changed

or saved.

Upload

Configuration File

The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file

from your computer to your Zyxel Device

You cannot upload a configuration file named system-default.conf or lastgood.conf.

If you upload startup-config.conf, it will replace the current configuration and immediately

apply the new settings.

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

Browse… Click Browse… to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a

“.conf” filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a fie of a

different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can

upload them.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

212

9Wait for the file transfer to complete.

10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

19.3 Firmware Package

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package to open this screen. Use the Firmware Package

screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the Zyxel Device.

Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only

need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the

CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and

how to recover it.

Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses a .bin extension.

The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset

the Zyxel Device while the firmware update is in progress!

C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2

Connected to 192.168.1.2.

220———- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ———-

220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.

220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.

220-This is a private system — No anonymous login

220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.

User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin

331 User admin OK. Password required

Password:

230 OK. Current restricted directory is /

ftp> cd conf

250 OK. Current directory is /conf

ftp> ls

200 PORT command successful

150 Connecting to port 5001

lastgood.conf

startup-config.conf

system-default.conf

226 3 matches total

ftp: 57 bytes received in 0.33Seconds 0.17Kbytes/sec.

ftp> get startup-config.conf

200 PORT command successful

150 Connecting to port 5002

226-File successfully transferred

226 0.002 seconds (measured here), 1.66 Mbytes per second

ftp: 2928 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 183.00Kbytes/sec.

ftp>

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

213

Figure 129 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Zyxel

Device again.

Note: The Zyxel Device automatically reboots after a successful upload.

The Zyxel Device automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating

systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected

After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Dashboard screen.

19.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP

This procedure requires the Zyxel Device’s firmware. Download the firmware package from

www.zyxel.com and unzip it. The firmware file uses a .bin extension, for example, «600ABFH0C0.bin». Do

the following after you have obtained the firmware file.

1Connect your computer to the Zyxel Device.

2The FTP server IP address of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer to

use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.

Table 93 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Boot Module This is the version of the boot module that is currently on the Zyxel Device.

Current Version This is the firmware version and the date created.

Released Date This is the date that the version of the firmware was created.

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse… to find it.

Browse… Click Browse… to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress

compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

214

3Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device. For example, in the Windows

command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when

the firmware recovery finishes.

4Enter your user name when prompted.

5Enter your password as requested.

6Enter “hash” for FTP to print a `#’ character for every 1024 bytes of data you upload so that you can

watch the file transfer progress.

7Enter “bin” to set the transfer mode to binary.

8Transfer the firmware file from your computer to the Zyxel Device. Type put followed by the path and

name of the firmware file. This examples uses put C:\ftproot\Zyxel Device_FW\600ABFH0C0.bin.

9Wait for the file transfer to complete.

10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

19.4 Shell Script

Use shell script files to have the Zyxel Device use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create

the shell script files. They must use a “.zysh” filename extension.

Click Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store,

name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the Zyxel

Device at the same time.

Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write

command, the changes will be lost when the Zyxel Device restarts. You could use

multiple write commands in a long script.

C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2

Connected to 192.168.1.2.

220———- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ———-

220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.

220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.

220-This is a private system — No anonymous login

220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.

User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin

331 User admin OK. Password required

Password:

230 OK. Current restricted directory is /

ftp> hash

Hash mark printing On ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .

ftp> bin

200 TYPE is now 8-bit binary

ftp> put C:\ftproot\Zyxel Device_FW\600ABFH0C0.bin

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

215

Figure 131 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 94 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Rename Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device.

You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the Zyxel Device.

Click a shell script’s row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.

Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the

configuration file.

Remove Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the Zyxel

Device.

A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete

the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file.

Download Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your

computer.

Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device.

Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.

Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the

configuration file.

Apply Use this button to have the Zyxel Device use a specific shell script file.

Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Apply to have the Zyxel Device use that shell script

file. You may need to wait awhile for the Zyxel Device to finish applying the commands.

#This column displays the number for each shell script file entry.

File Name This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file.

Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file.

Last

Modified

This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or

saved.

Upload Shell

Script

The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from

your computer to your Zyxel Device.

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse… to find it.

Chapter 19 File Manager

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

216

Browse… Click Browse… to find the .zysh file you want to upload.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes.

Table 94 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

217

CHAPTER 20

Diagnostics

20.1 Overview

Use the diagnostics screen for troubleshooting.

20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Diagnostics screen (Section 20.2 on page 217) generates a file containing the Zyxel Device’s

configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during

troubleshooting.

20.2 Diagnostics

This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the Zyxel Device’s configuration

and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer support during

troubleshooting. All categories of settings and shell script files stored on the Zyxel Device will be included

in the diagnostic file.

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostics screen. Click Collect Now to have the Zyxel

Device create a new diagnostic file.

Figure 132 Maintenance > Diagnostics

The Debug Information Center screen then displays showing whether the collection is in progress, was

successful, or has failed. When the data collection is done, click Download to save the most recent

diagnostic file to a computer.

Chapter 20 Diagnostics

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

218

Figure 133 Maintenance > Diagnostics: Debug Information Collector

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

219

CHAPTER 21

LEDs

21.1 Overview

The LEDs of your Zyxel Device can be controlled such that they stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device

is ready. There are two features that control the LEDs of your Zyxel DeviceLocator and Suppression (see

Section 1.4 on page 19).

21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Suppression screen (Section 21.2 on page 219) allows you to set how you want the LEDs to

behave after the Zyxel Device is ready.

The Locator screen (Section 21.3 on page 220) allows users to see the actual location of the Zyxel

Device between several devices in the network.

21.2 Suppression Screen

The LED Suppression feature allows you to control how the LEDs of your Zyxel Device behave after it’s

ready. The default LED suppression setting of your AP is different depending on your Zyxel Device model.

You can go to the Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression screen to see the default LED behavior and

change the LED suppression setting. After you make changes in the suppression screen, it will be stored

as the default when the Zyxel Device is restarted. See (Section 3.2 on page 34) for information on default

values for different models.

Note: When the Zyxel Device is booting or performing firmware upgrade, the LEDs will light up

regardless of the setting in LED suppression.

To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression.

Chapter 21 LEDs

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

220

Figure 134 Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression

The following table describes fields in the above screen.

21.3 Locator Screen

The Locator feature identifies the location of your Zyxel Device among several devices in the network.

You can run this feature and set a timer in this screen.

To run the locator feature, enter a number of minutes and click Turn On button to have the Zyxel Device

find its location. The Locator LED will start to blink for the number of minutes set in the Locator screen. The

default setting is 10 minutes. While the locator is running, the turn on button will gray out and return after

it’s finished. If you make changes to the time default setting, it will be stored as the default when the

Zyxel Device restarts.

Note: The Locator feature is not affected by the Suppression setting.

To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Locator.

Table 95 Maintenance > LED > Suppression

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Suppression On If the Suppression On check box is checked, the LEDs of your Zyxel Device will turn off after

it’s ready.

If the check box is unchecked, the LEDs will stay lit after the Zyxel Device is ready.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 21 LEDs

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

221

Figure 135 Maintenance > LEDs > Locator

The following table describes fields in the above screen.

Table 96 Maintenance > LED > Locator

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Turn On

Turn Off

Click Turn On button to activate the locator. The Locator function will show the actual

location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network.

Otherwise, click Turn Off to disable the locator feature.

Automatically Extinguish

After

Enter a time interval between 1 and 60 minutes to stop the locator LED from blinking.

Default is 10 minutes.

Apply Click Apply to save changes in this screen.

Refresh Click Refresh to update the information in this screen.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

222

CHAPTER 22

Antenna Switch

22.1 Overview

Use this screen to adjust coverage depending on the orientation of the antenna.

22.1.1 What You Need To Know

Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.

On the Zyxel Device that comes with internal antennas and also has an antenna switch, you can adjust

coverage depending on the antenna orientation for the Zyxel Device radios using the web

configurator, the command line interface (CLI) or a physical switch. Check Section 1.4 on page 19 to

see if your Zyxel Device has an antenna switch.

Figure 136 WAC Physical Antenna Switch

Note: With the physical antenna switch, you apply the same antenna orientation settings to

both radios. You can set the radios to have different settings while using the web

configurator or the command line interface.

Note: The antenna switch in the web configurator has priority over the physical antenna

switch after you Enable Software Control in the Maintenance > Antenna screen. By

default, software control is disabled.

22.2 Antenna Switch Screen

To access this screen, click Maintenance > Antenna.

The screen varies depending on whether the Zyxel Device has a physical antenna switch or allows you

to change antenna orientation settings on a per-radio basis or on a per-AP basis.

Chapter 22 Antenna Switch

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

223

Figure 137 Maintenance > Antenna > Antenna Switch (Per Radio)

Figure 138 Maintenance > Antenna > Antenna Switch (Per AP)

If the Zyxel Device has a physical antenna switch, select the Enable Software Control option to use the

Web configurator to adjust coverage depending on each radio’s antenna orientation for better

coverage.

Select Wall if you mount the Zyxel Device to a wall. Select Ceiling if the Zyxel Device is mounted on a

ceiling. You can switch from Wall to Ceiling if there are still wireless dead zones, and vice versa.

Click Apply to save your changes or click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

224

CHAPTER 23

Reboot

23.1 Overview

Use this screen to restart the Zyxel Device.

23.1.1 What You Need To Know

If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change

when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to

save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot.

Reboot is different to reset; reset returns the Zyxel Device to its default configuration.

23.2 Reboot

This screen allows remote users can restart the Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Maintenance >

Reboot.

Figure 139 Maintenance > Reboot

Click the Reboot button to restart the Zyxel Device. Wait a few minutes until the login screen appears. If

the login screen does not appear, type the IP address of the Zyxel Device in your Web browser.

You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the Zyxel Device.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

225

CHAPTER 24

Shutdown

24.1 Overview

Use this screen to shut down the Zyxel Device.

Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown

command before you turn off the Zyxel Device or remove the power.

Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.

24.1.1 What You Need To Know

Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Shutdown is

different to reset; reset returns the Zyxel Device to its default configuration.

24.2 Shutdown

To access this screen, click Maintenance > Shutdown.

Figure 140 Maintenance > Shutdown

Click the Shutdown button to shut down the Zyxel Device. Wait for the Zyxel Device to shut down before

you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power.

You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shut down the Zyxel Device.

226

PART II

Local Configuration

in Cloud Mode

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

227

CHAPTER 25

Cloud Mode

25.1 Overview

The Zyxel Device is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula C ontrol Center) when

it is connected to the Internet and has been registered in the NCC. If you need to change the Zyxel

Device’s VLAN setting or manually set its IP address, access its simplified web configurator (see Chapter

4 on page 53). You can check the NCC’s Access Point > Monitor > Access Points screen or the

connected gateway for the Zyxel Device’s current LAN IP address. Alternatively, disconnect the

gateway or disable its DHCP server function and use the Zyxel Device’s default static LAN IP address

(192.168.1.2).

25.2 Cloud Mode Web Configurator Screens

When your Zyxel Device is managed through NCC, you can access only the following screens through

the Web Configurator:

Dashboard

Configuration > Network > IP Setting

Configuration > Network > VLAN

Maintenance > Shell Script

Maintenance > Diagnostics

Chapter 25 Cloud Mode

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

228

Maintenance > Log

These screens also have fewer options than those in standalone Zyxel Devices. The rest of the Zyxel

Device’s features must be configured through the NCC.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

229

CHAPTER 26

Dashboard

This screen displays general AP information, and client information in widgets that you can re-arrange to

suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets.

Figure 141 Dashboard

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 97 Dashboard

LABEL DESCRIPTION

AP Information

MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the Zyxel Device.

Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the Zyxel Device.

Product Model This field displays the model name of the Zyxel Device.

2.4G Channel

Information This field displays the channel number the Zyxel Device is using and its output power in the

2.4 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled.

5G Channel

Information This field displays the channel number the Zyxel Device is using and its output power in the 5

GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled.

Ethernet This field displays whether the Zyxel Device’s Ethernet port is connected and the IP address

of the gateway to which the Zyxel Device is connected.

Internet This field displays whether the Zyxel Device is connecting to the Internet.

Nebula

Connectivity

Status

This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control Center

(NCC).

Chapter 26 Dashboard

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

230

If the Zyxel Device cannot connect to the Internet or to NCC, an error message is shown on this screen,

as in the following.

Nebula Control

Center

Activation Status

This field displays whether the Zyxel Device has been registered and can be managed by

the NCC.

Use Proxy to

Access NCC This displays whether the NAP uses a proxy server to access the NCC (Nebula Control

Center).

Table 97 Dashboard (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

231

CHAPTER 27

Network

27.1 Overview

This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your

Zyxel Device in cloud mode.

See Section 9.1 on page 94 for information about IP addresses.

Note: Make sure your VLAN settings allow the Zyxel Device to connect to the Internet so you

could manage it with NCC.

27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The IP Setting screen (Section 27.2 on page 231) configures the Zyxel Device’s LAN IP address.

The VLAN screen (Section 27.3 on page 233) configures the Zyxel Device’s VLAN settings.

27.2 IP Setting

Use this screen to configure the IP address for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click

Configuration > Network > IP Setting.

Chapter 27 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

232

Figure 142 Configuration > Network > IP Setting

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 98 Configuration > Network > IP Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

IP Address Assignment

Get

Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address,

subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.

Use Fixed IP

Address Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.

IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface.

Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates

what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.

Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway. The Zyxel Device sends packets to the gateway when

it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the

same network as the interface.

DNS Server IP

Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server.

Use Proxy to Access

Internet

If the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure the

proxy server settings so that the Zyxel Device can access the NCC through the proxy server.

Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server.

Proxy Port Enter service port number used by the proxy server.

Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to the

Internet.

User Name Enter your proxy user name.

Password Enter your proxy password.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

Chapter 27 Network

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

233

27.3 VLAN

This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Device’s VLAN settings. See Section 9.3 on page 98 for

more information about VLAN.

Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click

Configuration > Network > VLAN.

Figure 143 Configuration > Network > VLAN

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 99 Configuration > Network > VLAN

LABEL DESCRIPTION

VLAN Settings

Management

VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device.

Untagged/

Tagged Set whether the Zyxel Device adds the VLAN ID to outbound traffic transmitted through its

Ethernet port.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device.

Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

234

CHAPTER 28

Maintenance

28.1 Overview

When the Zyxel Device is set to work in cloud mode, the Maintenance screens let you mange shell script

files on the Zyxel Device, generate a diagnostic file, or view log messages.

See Chapter 19 on page 206 for information about shell scripts.

28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

The Shell Script screen (Section 28.2 on page 234) stores, names, downloads, and uploads shell script

files.

The Diagnostics screen (Section 28.3 on page 235) generates a file containing the Zyxel Device’s

configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during

troubleshooting.

The Log > View Log screen (Section 28.4 on page 236) displays the Zyxel Device’s current log

messages when it is disconnected from the NCC.

28.2 Shell Script

Use shell script files to have the Zyxel Device use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create

the shell script files. They must use a “.zysh” filename extension.

Click Maintenance > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name,

download, and upload shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the Zyxel Device at the

same time.

Figure 144 Maintenance > Shell Script

Chapter 28 Maintenance

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

235

Each field is described in the following table.

28.3 Diagnostics

This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the Zyxel Device’s configuration

and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer support during

troubleshooting. All categories of settings and shell script files stored on the Zyxel Device will be included

in the diagnostic file.

Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostics screen. Click Collect Now to have the Zyxel

Device create a new diagnostic file.

Table 100 Maintenance > Shell Script

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Rename Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device.

You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the Zyxel Device.

Click a shell script’s row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.

Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the

configuration file.

Remove Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the Zyxel

Device.

A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete

the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file.

Download Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your

computer.

Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device.

Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.

Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).

Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the

configuration file.

#This column displays the number for each shell script file entry.

File Name This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file.

Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file.

Last

Modified

This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or

saved.

Upload Shell

Script

The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from

your computer to your Zyxel Device.

File Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse… to find it.

Browse… Click Browse… to find the .zysh file you want to upload.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes.

Chapter 28 Maintenance

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

236

Figure 145 Maintenance > Diagnostics

The Debug Information Center screen then displays showing whether the collection is in progress, was

successful, or has failed. When the data collection is done, click Download to save the most recent

diagnostic file to a computer.

Figure 146 Maintenance > Diagnostics: Debug Information Collector

28.4 View Log

The NCC periodically gathers log files from the devices being managed by it. Before the NCC pulls logs

from the Zyxel Device or when the Zyxel Device is disconnected from the NCC, you can use this screen

to view its current log messages. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Log.

Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages

automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log

message first.

Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black.

Click a column’s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column’s criteria. Click the heading cell

again to reverse the sort order.

Chapter 28 Maintenance

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

237

Figure 147 Maintenance > Log > View Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 101 Maintenance > Log > View Log

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Show Filter / Hide

Filter

Click this button to show or hide the filter settings.

If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are

available.

If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source

Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available.

Display Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one

time, or you can view the Debug Log.

Priority This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log

displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error,

warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the

Category is Debug Log.

Source Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that

generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter.

Destination

Address

This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming

packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter.

Source Interface This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated

the log message.

Destination

Interface

This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that

generated the log message.

Protocol This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would

like to see.

Keyword This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source,

Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You

can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks

()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed.

Search This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter

settings.

Chapter 28 Maintenance

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

238

Refresh Click this to update the list of logs.

Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen.

#This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.

Time This field displays the time the log message was recorded.

Priority This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority

field above.

Category This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the

Display and (other) Category fields.

Message This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text “[count=x]”, where x is a

number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple

entries were aggregated to generate into this one.

Source This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the

log message.

Source Interface This field displays the source interface of the packet that generated the log message.

Destination This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated

the log message.

Destination

Interface

This field displays the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message.

Protocol This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message.

Note This field displays any additional information about the log message.

Table 101 Maintenance > Log > View Log (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

239

PART III

Appendices and

Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

240

CHAPTER 29

Troubleshooting

29.1 Overview

This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are

divided into the following categories.

Power, Hardware Connections, and LED

Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login

Internet Access

WiFi Network

Resetting the Zyxel Device

29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED

The Zyxel Device does not turn on. The LED is not on.

1Make sure you are using the power adapter included with the Zyxel Device or a PoE power injector/

switch.

2Make sure the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch is connected to the Zyxel Device and

plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.

3Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch.

4Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.

5If none of these steps work, you may have faulty hardware and should contact your Zyxel Device

vendor.

The LED does not behave as expected.

1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.2 on page 34.

2Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.

3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

241

4Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector to the Zyxel Device.

5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

29.3 Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login

I forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device.

1The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2.

2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory

defaults. See Section 29.6 on page 247.

3If your Zyxel Device is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information

is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this

information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information.

4If the NCC has managed the Zyxel Device, you can also check the NCC’s AP > Monitor > Access Point

screen for the Zyxel Device‘s current LAN IP address.

I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.

The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2.

If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.

If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I

forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device.

2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start

Guide and Section 3.2 on page 34.

3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java

enabled.

4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Zyxel Device. (If you know that there are routers

between your computer and the Zyxel Device, skip this step.)

If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address.

If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP address is in the same

subnet as the Zyxel Device.

5Reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Zyxel Device with the default IP

address. See Section 29.6 on page 247.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

242

6If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced

suggestions.

Advanced Suggestions

Try to access the Zyxel Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Zyxel

Device, check the remote management settings to find out why the Zyxel Device does not respond

to HTTP.

If your computer is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.

I forgot the password.

1The default password is 1234. If the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC and registered, check the

NCC for the password.

2If this does not work, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.6 on page

247.

I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Zyxel Device.

1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default password is 1234. This

fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.

2You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Zyxel Device. Log

out of the Zyxel Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.

3Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector to the Zyxel Device.

4If this does not work, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.6 on page

247.

I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new

firmware.

See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

Ignore the suggestions about your browser.

I cannot access the Zyxel Device directly anymore after switching to NCC management.

Check the Zyxel Device IP address and login credentials using the NCC and use them to access the

Zyxel Device. Note that the built-in Web Configurator will have limited functionality when managed

through NCC.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

243

I enabled NCC Discovery, but the Zyxel Device is still in standalone mode.

Make sure your Zyxel Device is registered to the NCC.

The Zyxel Device is already registered with NCC, but it is still in standalone mode; it cannot

connect to the NCC.

1Make sure that NCC Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.6 on page 103).

2Check your network’s firewall/security settings. Make sure the following TCP ports are allowed: 443, 4335,

and 6667.

3Make sure your Zyxel Device can access the Internet.

4Check your network’s VLAN settings (see Section 9.3 on page 98). You may have to change the

Management VLAN settings of the Zyxel Device to allow it to connect to the Internet and access the

NCC.

Note: Changing the management VLAN and IP address settings on the Zyxel Device also

pushes these changes to the NCC. Do this only if your device cannot otherwise

connect to the NCC.

5Make sure your Zyxel Device doesn’t have to go through network authentication such as a captive

portal, If your network uses a captive portal, the network administrator may have to create a new VLAN

without this requirement. Change your Zyxel Device’s management VLAN settings as necessary.

I want to switch from NCC to AC management, but I couldn’t find the AC Discovery menu in the

Zyxel Device web configurator.

1Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC.

2Reset your Zyxel Device to the factory defaults.

3Make sure that your Zyxel Device is in the same subnet as the AC, and enable AC Discovery in

Configuration > Network > AC Discovery.

The Zyxel Device cannot discover the AC.

1Make sure your Zyxel Device is not registered to NCC.

2Enable AC Discovery in Configuration > Network > AC Discovery.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

244

3Make sure that the Zyxel Device and the AC are both in the same subnet.

4If you have to set them up in different subnets, see AC management and IP Subnets on page 96.

I accidentally pressed the Nebula button in the NXC’s web configurator. How do I undo it?

1If the Zyxel Device is not registered with the NCC, register it first.

2Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC.

3Reset the Zyxel Device to the factory defaults.

Some features I set using the NCC do not work as expected.

1Make sure your Zyxel Device can access the Internet.

2Check your network’s firewall/security settings. Make sure the following ports are allowed:

TCP: 443, 4335, and 6667

UDP: 123

3After changing your Zyxel Device settings using the NCC, wait 1-2 minutes for the changes to take

effect.

I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing.

When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages (see Section 1.4 on page 19), new log

messages automatically overwrite the oldest log messages.

The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly.

In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to have the

Zyxel Device treat the line as a comment.

Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!” to

have the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode.

•Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the Zyxel Device

restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script.

Note: “exit” or “!’” must follow sub commands if it is to make the Zyxel Device exit sub

command mode.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

245

I cannot upload the firmware uploaded using FTP.

The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware in standalone mode. For

managed Zyxel Devices, using the NCC or AC is recommended. You only need to use FTP if you need to

recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the

firmware and how to recover it.

29.4 Internet Access

Clients cannot access the Internet through the Zyxel Device.

1Check the Zyxel Device’s hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected

(refer to Section 3.2 on page 34). See the Quick Start Guide and Section 29.2 on page 240.

2Make sure the Zyxel Device is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and

your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address.

3If clients are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings on the wireless clients

are the same as the settings on the Zyxel Device.

4Disconnect all the cables from your Zyxel Device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide

again.

5Reboot the client and reconnect to the Zyxel Device.

6If the problem continues, contact your ISP.

The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.

1There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 3.2 on page 34. If the

Zyxel Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet,

especially peer-to-peer applications.

2Check the signal strength using the NCC, AC, Zyxel Device Web Configurator, or the client device itself.

If the signal is weak, try moving the client closer to the Zyxel Device (if possible), and look around to see

if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (microwaves, other wireless

networks, and so on).

3Reboot the Zyxel Device using the web configurator/CLI or the NCC or AC.

4Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, activate it. When enabled, raise or lower the priority for some

applications.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

246

5If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor.

29.5 WiFi Network

I cannot access the Zyxel Device or ping any computer from the WLAN.

1Make sure the wireless LAN (wireless radio) is enabled on the Zyxel Device.

2Make sure the radio or at least one of the Zyxel Device’s radios is operating in AP mode.

3Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is working properly.

4Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the

same wireless standard as the Zyxel Device’s active radio.

5Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the Zyxel

Device.

6Check that both the Zyxel Device and your computer are using the same wireless and wireless security

settings.

Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN.

WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software.

It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security

mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2-PSK is recommended.

The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified.

If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS server has

priority. Change the RADIUS server’s configuration if you need to use a different re-authentication timer

setting.

I cannot import a certificate into the Zyxel Device.

1For My Certificates, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that

was generated by the Zyxel Device. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the

certificate’s public and private keys.

2You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the certificate.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

247

3Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.

PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase

letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.

Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures)

that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not

included. The Zyxel Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single

certificate.

PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters,

uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.

Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key

in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not connected to

your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must

provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the Zyxel Device.

Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this

to occur since many programs use text files by default.

Wireless clients are not being load balanced among my Zyxel Devices.

Make sure that all the Zyxel Devices used by the wireless clients in question share the same SSID,

security, and radio settings.

Make sure that all the Zyxel Devices are in the same broadcast domain.

Make sure that the wireless clients are in range of the other Zyxel Devices; if they are only in range of a

single Zyxel Device, then load balancing may not be as effective.

In the Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List screen, there is no load balancing indicator

associated with any Zyxel Devices assigned to the load balancing task.

Check that the AP profile which contains the load balancing settings is correctly assigned to the Zyxel

Devices in question.

The load balancing task may have been terminated because further load balancing on the Zyxel

Devices in question is no longer required.

29.6 Resetting the Zyxel Device

If you cannot access the Zyxel Device by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and then

on again. If you still cannot access the Zyxel Device by any method or you forget the administrator

password(s), you can reset the Zyxel Device to its factory-default settings. Any configuration files or shell

scripts that you saved on the Zyxel Device should still be available afterwards.

Use the following procedure to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the

settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file.

Chapter 29 Troubleshooting

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

248

Note: This procedure removes the current configuration.

1Make sure the Power LED is on and not blinking.

2Press the RESET button and hold it until the Power LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about ten

seconds.)

3Release the RESET button, and wait for the Zyxel Device to restart.

You should be able to access the Zyxel Device in standalone mode using the default settings.

29.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help

Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

249

APPENDIX A

Importing Certificates

This appendix shows you how to import public key certificates into your web browser.

Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate. When a

certificate authority such as VeriSign, Comodo, or Network Solutions, to name a few, receives a

certificate request from a website operator, they confirm that the web domain and contact information

in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar. If they match, then the

certificate is issued to the website operator, who then places it on the site to be issued to all visiting web

browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate.

Many Zyxel products, such as the Zyxel Device, issue their own public key certificates. These can be used

by web browsers on a LAN or WAN to verify that they are in fact connecting to the legitimate device

and not one masquerading as it. However, because the certificates were not issued by one of the

several organizations officially recognized by the most common web browsers, you will need to import

the Zyxel-created certificate into your web browser and flag that certificate as a trusted authority.

Note: You can see if you are browsing on a secure website if the URL in your web browser’s

address bar begins with https:// or there is a sealed padlock icon ( ) somewhere

in the main browser window (not all browsers show the padlock in the same location).

Google Chrome

The following example uses Google Chrome on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your

computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

250

Export a Certificate

1If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then upon browsing with it for the first

time, you are presented with a certification error.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

251

2Click Advanced > Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe).

3In the Address Bar, click Not Secure > Certificate (Invalid).

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

252

4In the Certificate dialog box, click Details > Copy to File.

5In the Certificate Export Wizard, click Next.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

253

6Select the format and settings you want to use and then click Next.

7Type a filename and specify a folder to save the certificate in. Click Next.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

254

8In the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard screen, click Finish.

9Finally, click OK when presented with the successful certificate export message.

Import a Certificate

After storing the certificate in your computer (see Export a Certificate), you need to install it as a trusted

root certification authority using the following steps:

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

255

1Open your web browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

256

2Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage

certificates.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

257

3In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities. Click Import to start the

Certificate Import Wizard.

4Click Next when the wizard pops up, and then on the following screen click Browse.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

258

5Select the certificate file you want to import and click Open.

6Click Next.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

259

7Confirm the settings displayed and click Finish.

8If presented with a security warning, click Yes.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

260

9Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import.

Install a Stand-Alone Certificate File

Rather than installing a public key certificate using web browser settings, you can install a stand-alone

certificate file if one has been issued to you.

1Double-click the public key certificate file.

2Click Install Certificate.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

261

3Click Next on the first wizard screen, click Place all certificates in the following store, and click Browse.

4Select Trusted Root Certificate Authorities > OK, and then click Next.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

262

5Confirm the information shown on the final wizard screen and click Finish.

6If presented with a security warning, click Yes.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

263

7Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import.

Remove a Certificate in Google Chrome

This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Google Chrome on Windows 7.

1Open your web browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

264

2Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage

certificates.

3In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

265

4Select the certificate you want to remove and click Remove.

5Click Yes when you see the following warning message.

6Confirm the details displayed in the warning message and click Yes.

Firefox

The following example uses Mozilla Firefox on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your

computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

266

Export a Certificate

1If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it you are

presented with a certification error. Click Advanced.

2Click View Certificate.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

267

3Click Details > Export.

4Type a filename and click Save.

Import a Certificate

After storing the certificate in your computer, you need to import it in trusted root certification authorities

using the following steps:

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

268

1Open Firefox and click Tools > Options.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

269

2In the Options page, click Privacy & Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View

Certificates.

3In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities > Import.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

270

4Use the Select File dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Open.

5Select Trust this CA to identify websites and click OK.

Removing a Certificate in Firefox

This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Firefox.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

271

1Open Firefox and click Tools > Options.

2In the Options page, click Privacy & Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View

Certificates.

Appendix A Importing Certificates

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

272

3In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities and select the certificate you want to remove, Click Delete

or Distrust.

.

4In the following dialog box, click OK.

5The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed, a

certification error appears.

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

273

APPENDIX B

IPv6

Overview

IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in

IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses.

IPv6 Addressing

The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an

example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.

IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be

written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.

Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can

only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be

written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,

2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.

Prefix and Prefix Length

Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6

prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the

network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example,

2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32

means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.

Link-local Address

A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP

address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-

local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as

follows.

Table 102 Link-local Unicast Address Format

Global Address

A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in IPv4. A

global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.

1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID

10 bits 54 bits 64 bits

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

274

Unspecified Address

An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have

its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.

Loopback Address

A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to “127.0.0.1”

in IPv4.

Multicast Address

In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is

not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group.

Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a

predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses.

The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a

multicast group.

Table 103 Predefined Multicast Address

MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION

FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.

FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.

FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.

FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.

FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.

FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.

Table 104 Reserved Multicast Address

MULTICAST ADDRESS

FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

275

Subnet Masking

Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into

eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character

(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example,

FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.

Interface ID

In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet

port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should

have a unique interface ID.

EUI-64

The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte)

Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes

of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the

following example.

Stateless Autoconfiguration

With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.

Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful

autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP server.

Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated

on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC

address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.

When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning

with fe80).

When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Zyxel Device is set to automatically

obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 1another address which

combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable

global IP address.

DHCPv6

The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that

allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration

information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP.

Table 105

MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56

Table 106

EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56

1. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

276

Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification

when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time,

vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor’s private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not

change over time even after you reboot the device.

Identity Association

An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the

server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly

one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP

server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.

The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity

association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses.

An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1

and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any

addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which

the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server

does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the

client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client’s discretion.

DHCP Relay Agent

A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between

the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast

address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to

a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.

The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option

to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the

system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the

DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay

agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-

Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should

not change even after the relay agent restarts.

Prefix Delegation

Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or

a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Zyxel Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example,

2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by

multicast, the Zyxel Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the

prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.

T1

T2

Renew Rebind

Rebind

to S1

Renew

to S1

Renew

to S1

Renew

to S1

Renew

to S1

Renew

to S1

to S2

to S2

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

277

ICMPv6

Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has

a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4.

ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet

processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as «ping».

Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track

neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:

Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC

address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it

responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message.

Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.

Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and

forward packets.

Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from

a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.

IPv6 Cache

An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list.

The Zyxel Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response

messages. In IPv6, the Zyxel Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a

neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or

verified, the Zyxel Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Zyxel Device

receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the neighbor

cache. When the Zyxel Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a

router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and

destination cache. The Zyxel Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be

used as a default router.

When the Zyxel Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the

next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Zyxel Device uses the prefix list to

determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing

through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Zyxel

Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP

address is known, the Zyxel Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends

the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Zyxel Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor

cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps

reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.

Multicast Listener Discovery

The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4’s Internet

Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP

message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

278

MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive

multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.

MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.

MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.

MLD Messages

A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast

forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message

for that address.

An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a

multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a

group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices

connected to this port should remain in the group.

Example — Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista

By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6

install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig

command to see auto-generated IP addresses.

IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your

automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the

interface on your computer.

Example — Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP

Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have

to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses

or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.)

This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

C:\>ipv6 install

Installing…

Succeeded.

C:\>ipconfig

Windows IP Configuration

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

279

1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.

2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service.

3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.

4Double click Dibbler — a DHCPv6 client.

5Click Start and then OK.

6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.

Example — Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7

Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7

computer.

To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

Appendix B IPv6

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

280

1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.

2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.

3Click OK to save the change.

4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.

5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.

6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address

(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.

C:\>ipconfig

Windows IP Configuration

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000

Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11

IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11

172.16.100.254

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

281

APPENDIX C

Customer Support

In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If

you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the

device.

See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also

https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.

Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.

Required Information

Product model and serial number.

Warranty Information.

Date that you received your device.

Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.

Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)

Taiwan

Zyxel Communications Corporation

http://www.zyxel.com

Asia

China

Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp.

Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp.

Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp.

https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/

India

•Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd

https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/

Kazakhstan

•Zyxel Kazakhstan

https://www.zyxel.kz

Appendix C Customer Support

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

282

Korea

Zyxel Korea Corp.

http://www.zyxel.kr

Malaysia

Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd.

http://www.zyxel.com.my

Pakistan

Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.

http://www.zyxel.com.pk

Philippines

Zyxel Philippines

http://www.zyxel.com.ph

Singapore

Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd.

http://www.zyxel.com.sg

Taiwan

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand

Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd

https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/

Vietnam

Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office

https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi

Europe

Belarus

•Zyxel BY

https://www.zyxel.by

Belgium

Zyxel Communications B.V.

https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

Appendix C Customer Support

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

283

https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria

•Zyxel България

https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic

Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o

https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/

Denmark

Zyxel Communications A/S

https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/

Estonia

Zyxel Estonia

https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland

Zyxel Communications

https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/

France

•Zyxel France

https://www.zyxel.fr

Germany

•Zyxel Deutschland GmbH

https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/

Hungary

Zyxel Hungary & SEE

https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/

Italy

Zyxel Communications Italy

https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/

Latvia

•Zyxel Latvia

https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/

Appendix C Customer Support

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

284

Lithuania

•Zyxel Lithuania

https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/

Netherlands

Zyxel Benelux

https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/

Norway

Zyxel Communications

https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/

Poland

Zyxel Communications Poland

https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/

Romania

Zyxel Romania

https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro

Russia

Zyxel Russia

https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/

Slovakia

Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka

https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/

Spain

Zyxel Communications ES Ltd

https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/

Sweden

Zyxel Communications

https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/

Switzerland

•Studerus AG

https://www.zyxel.ch/de

https://www.zyxel.ch/fr

Appendix C Customer Support

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

285

Turkey

Zyxel Turkey A.S.

https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/

UK

Zyxel Communications UK Ltd.

https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/

Ukraine

•Zyxel Ukraine

http://www.ua.zyxel.com

South America

Argentina

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Brazil

Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda.

https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Colombia

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Ecuador

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

South America

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Middle East

Israel

Zyxel Communications Corporation

http://il.zyxel.com/

Appendix C Customer Support

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

286

Middle East

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

North America

USA

Zyxel Communications, Inc. — North America Headquarters

https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

Oceania

Australia

Zyxel Communications Corporation

https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

Africa

South Africa

Nology (Pty) Ltd.

https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

287

APPENDIX D

Legal Information

Copyright

Copyright © 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation.

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any

language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or

otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation.

Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimers

Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any

license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein

without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Your use of the Zyxel Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers.

Trademarks

Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.

Regulatory Notice and Statement

UNITED STATES of AMERICA

The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.

FCC EMC Statement

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and

can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

Increase the separation between the devices

Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s

Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate this equipment.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter. This transmitter must be at least 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with

any other antenna or transmitter.

Country Code selection feature to be disabled for products marketed to the US/CANADA.

Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only, except for relevant user’s manual mention that this device can be installed into the

external environment. (WAC6553D-E is a device for outdoor use.)

BRAZIL

The following applies if you use the product within Brazil.

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo

tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

288

CANADA

The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area.

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s

licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This radio transmitter (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS (NWA1302-AC),

2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA5123-AC), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA5123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC6502DE (WAC6502D-S, WAC6502D-E), 2468C-

WAC6503DS (WAC6503D-S), 2468C-WAC6552DS (WAC6552D-S), 2468C-WAC6553DE (WAC6553D-E), 2468C-WAC6303DS (WAC6303D-S),

2468C-WAC6103DI (WAC6103D-I), 2468C-WAC5302DS (WAC5302D-S), 2468C-WAX650S (WAX650S)) has been approved by Innovation,

Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and

required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the

maximum gain indicated for any type listed, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

289

Antenna Information

ANTENNA MODEL NO. TYPE CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARK

NWA1123-ACv2 1 PIFA UFL 3.08

2 PIFA UFL 3.07

3 PIFA UFL 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz)

3.79 (5725~5850 MHz)

4 PIFA UFL 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz)

3.78 (5725~5850 MHz)

NWA1123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA1302-AC 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)

5 (5250-5350 MHz)

5 (5470-5725 MHz)

5 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA5123-AC 1 PIFA U.FL 3.08 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA U.FL 3.07 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA U.FL 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz)

3.91 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 PIFA U.FL 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz)

3.79 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA5123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6502D-E Dipole RSMA 5 7

WAC6502D-S Dipole IPEX 4 6

WAC6503D-S Dipole IPEX 4 6

WAC6553D-E Dipole N type 4.5 7

WAC6103D-I 1 PIFA U.FL 3.28 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3

Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4

2PIFA U.FL 3.37

3PIFA U.FL 3.15

4Dipole U.FL 4.33

5 Loop U.FL 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.23 (5725-5850 MHz)

Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7

Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8

6 Loop U.FL 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.22 (5725-5850 MHz)

7 Loop U.FL 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.36 (5725-5850 MHz)

8 Dipole U.FL 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz)

5.20 (5725-5850 MHz)

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

290

If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid,

The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel

mobile satellite systems.

For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the

equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and

Where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna model(s), and the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p.

elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.23 of RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated.

If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz, the following attention must be paid.

For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz

shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit.

L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et

Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions

suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Le présent émetteur radio (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS

(NWA1302-AC), 2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA5123-AC), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA5123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC6502DE (WAC6502D-S,

WAC6502D-E), 2468C-WAC6503DS (WAC6503D-S), 2468C-WAC6552DS (WAC6552D-S), 2468C-WAC6553DE (WAC6553D-E), 2468C-

WAC6303DS (WAC6303D-S), 2468C-WAC6103DI (WAC6103D-I), 2468C-WAC5302DS (WAC5302D-S), 2468C-WAX650S (WAX650S)) a été

approuvé par Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d’antenne énumérés ci

dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d’antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal

indiqué pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l’exploitation de l’émetteur.

WAC5302D-S 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)

5 (5250-5350 MHz)

5 (5470-5725 MHz)

5 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6303D-S 1 Direction U.FL 1.12 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Direction U.FL 1.29 (5150-5250 MHz)

1.07 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6552D-S

SECTX-DB r2.0

1 Direction I-PEX 0.8 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 4.22 (5150-5250 MHz)

5.34 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAX650S Direction U.FL 0 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.51 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.22 (5250-5350 MHz)

4.61 (5470-5725 MHz)

4.68 (5725-5850 MHz)

ANTENNA MODEL NO. TYPE CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARK

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

291

Informations Antenne

MODÈLE D’ANTENNE NB. TYPE CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARQUE

NWA1123-ACv2 1 PIFA UFL 3.08

2 PIFA UFL 3.07

3 PIFA UFL 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz)

3.79 (5725~5850 MHz)

4 PIFA UFL 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz)

3.78 (5725~5850 MHz)

NWA1123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA1302-AC 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)

5 (5250-5350 MHz)

5 (5470-5725 MHz)

5 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA5123-AC 1 PIFA U.FL 3.08 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA U.FL 3.07 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA U.FL 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz)

3.91 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 PIFA U.FL 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz)

3.79 (5725-5850 MHz)

NWA5123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)

4 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6502D-E Dipole RSMA 5 7

WAC6502D-S Dipole IPEX 4 6

WAC6503D-S Dipole IPEX 4 6

WAC6553D-E Dipole N type 4.5 7

WAC6103D-I 1 PIFA U.FL 3.28 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3

Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4

2PIFA U.FL 3.37

3PIFA U.FL 3.15

4Dipole U.FL 4.33

5 Loop U.FL 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.23 (5725-5850 MHz)

Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7

Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8

6 Loop U.FL 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.22 (5725-5850 MHz)

7 Loop U.FL 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.36 (5725-5850 MHz)

8 Dipole U.FL 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz)

5.20 (5725-5850 MHz)

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

292

Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est activée pour ce produit, il est nécessaire de porter une

attention particulière aux choses suivantes

Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande de 5 150 à 5 250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les

risques de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;

Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d’antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 à 5 850 MHz)

doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e. spécifiée pour l’exploitation point à point et l’exploitation non point à point, selon le cas;

Lorsqu’il y a lieu, les types d’antennes (s’il y en a plusieurs), les numéros de modèle de l’antenne et les pires angles d’inclinaison nécessaires

pour rester conforme à l’exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d’élévation, énoncée à la section 6.2.2.3 du CNR-247, doivent être

clairement indiqués.

Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est activée pour ce produit, il est nécessaire de porter une

attention particulière aux choses suivantes.

Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d’antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 à 5 350 MHz

et de 5 470 à 5 725 MHz doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e.

Industry Canada radiation exposure statement

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with a minimum distance of 22cm (NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC HD) between the radiator and your body.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with a minimum distance of 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) between the radiator and your body.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations:

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 22 cm (NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC HD) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre

corps.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

Caution:

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel

mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point

and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650

5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.

(v) WAC6553D-E is an outdoor device and only uses 5G Band 4 (5725-5850 MHz).

Avertissement:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les risques

de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer à la limite de

p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer à la limite de p.i.r.e. spécifiée pour

l’exploitation point à point et non point à point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi être avisés que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont désignés utilisateurs principaux (c.-à-

d., qu’ils ont la priorité) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des

dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.

(v) WAC6553D-E est un appareil exterieur et seulement utilise 5G Bane 4 (5725-5850 MHz).

WAC5302D-S 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)

5 (5250-5350 MHz)

5 (5470-5725 MHz)

5 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6303D-S 1 Direction U.FL 1.12 (2400-2483.5 MHz)

2 Direction U.FL 1.29 (5150-5250 MHz)

1.07 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAC6552D-S

SECTX-DB r2.0

1 Direction I-PEX 0.8 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 4.22 (5150-5250 MHz)

5.34 (5725-5850 MHz)

WAX650S Direction U.FL 0 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.51 (5150-5250 MHz)

4.22 (5250-5350 MHz)

4.61 (5470-5725 MHz)

4.68 (5725-5850 MHz)

MODÈLE D’ANTENNE NB. TYPE CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARQUE

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

293

EUROPEA N UNION

The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.

Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED)

Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/

EU (RED). And this product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation

except for the countries mentioned below table:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area

networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are

applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. Zyxel recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of

their national regulations for the 5GHz wireless LANs.

If this device for operation in the band 5150-5350 MHz, it is for indoor use only.

This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body.

The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:

NWA1123-ACv2 and NWA5123-AC

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.95 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 199.07 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 743.02 mW.

WAC6503D-S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 99.54 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 183.65 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 941.89 mW.

WAC6502D-E and WAC6502D-S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 94.19 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 194.98 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 986.28 mW.

WAC6553D-E

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.26 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.41 mW.

NWA1123-AC PRO and WAC6103D-I

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.68 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.75 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 966.05 mW.

NWA1302-AC and WAC5302D-S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 93.33 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.31 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 391.74 mW.

NWA1123-AC HD and NWA5123-AC HD

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.274 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.40 mW.

WAC6303D-S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 194.09 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.41 mW.

WAC6552D-S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 93.11 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 914.11 mW.

WAX650S

The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 91.2 mW,

The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 177.01 mW,

The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 899.5 mW.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

294

Български

(Bulgarian)

С настоящото Zyxel декларира, че това оборудване е в съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите

приложими разпоредбите на Директива 2014/53/ЕC.

National Restrictions

The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link

having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.

Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te

worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer

gegevens.

Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à

l’Institut Belge des services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples

détails.

Español

(Spanish)

Por medio de la presente Zyxel declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras

disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 2014/53/UE..

Čeština

(Czech)

Zyxel tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice

2014/53/EU.

Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede Zyxel erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i

direktiv 2014/53/EU.

National Restrictions

In Denmark, the band 5150 — 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.

I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 — 5350 også anvendes udendørs.

Deutsch

(German)

Hiermit erklärt Zyxel, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den

übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU befindet.

Eesti keel

(Estonian)

Käesolevaga kinnitab Zyxel seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 2014/53/EU põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist

tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Ελληνικά

(Greek)

ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Zyxel ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ εξοπλισμός ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ

∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 2014/53/EU.

English Hereby, Zyxel declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of

Directive 2014/53/EU.

Français

(French)

Par la présente Zyxel déclare que l’appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions

pertinentes de la directive 2014/53/EU.

Hrvatski

(Croatian)

Zyxel ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.

Íslenska

(Icelandic)

Hér með lýsir, Zyxel því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar 2014/53/

EU.

Italiano (Italian) Con la presente Zyxel dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti

stabilite dalla direttiva 2014/53/EU.

National Restrictions

This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation

Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner’s property, its use requires

a “general authorization.” Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.

Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione

delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all ‘interno del proprio fondo, l’utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede

una “Autorizzazione Generale”. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.

Latviešu valoda

(Latvian)

Ar šo Zyxel deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 2014/53/EU būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

National Restrictions

The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please

check http://www.esd.lv for more details.

2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk

informâcijas: http://www.esd.lv.

Lietuvių kalba

(Lithuanian)

Šiuo Zyxel deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 2014/53/EU Direktyvos nuostatas.

Magyar

(Hungarian)

Alulírott, Zyxel nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 2014/53/EU

irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, Zyxel, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm

fid-Dirrettiva 2014/53/EU.

Nederlands

(Dutch)

Hierbij verklaart Zyxel dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

bepalingen van richtlijn 2014/53/EU.

Polski (Polish) Niniejszym Zyxel oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami

Dyrektywy 2014/53/EU.

Português

(Portuguese)

Zyxel declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 2014/53/

EU.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

295

Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in those

countries.

2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the

gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).

List of national codes

Professional installation instruction (WAC6553D-E)

Please be advised that due to the unique function supplied by this product, the device is intended for use with our interactive entertainment

software and licensed third-party only. The product will be distributed through controlled distribution channel and installed by trained

professional and will not be sold directly to the general public through retail store.

1Installation personal

This product is designed for specific application and needs to be installed by a qualified personal who has RF and related rule knowledge. The

general user shall not attempt to install or change the setting.

2Installation location

The product shall be installed at a location where the radiating antenna can be kept 30 cm from nearby person in normal operation condition

to meet regulatory RF exposure requirement.

3External antenna

Use only the antennas which have been approved by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The non-approved antenna(s) may produce

unwanted spurious or excessive RF transmitting power which may lead to the violation of FCC/IC limit and is prohibited.

4Installation procedure

Please refer to user’s manual for the detail.

5Warning

Please carefully select the installation position and make sure that the final output power does not exceed the limit set force in relevant rules. The

violation of the rule could lead to serious federal penalty.

Română

(Romanian)

Prin prezenta, Zyxel declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi relevante ale

Directivei 2014/53/EU.

Slovenčina

(Slovak)

Zyxel týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 2014/53/EU.

Slovenščina

(Slovene)

Zyxel izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 2014/53/EU.

Suomi (Finnish) Zyxel vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien

direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Svenska

(Swedish)

Härmed intygar Zyxel att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta

bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 2014/53/EU.

Norsk

(Norwegian)

Erklærer herved Zyxel at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I

direktiv 2014/53/EU.

COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE

Austria AT Liechtenstein LI

Belgium BE Lithuania LT

Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU

Croatia HR Malta MT

Cyprus CY Netherlands NL

Czech Republic CR Norway NO

Denmark DK Poland PL

Estonia EE Portugal PT

Finland FI Romania RO

France FR Serbia RS

Germany DE Slovakia SK

Greece GR Slovenia SI

Hungary HU Spain ES

Iceland IS Sweden SE

Ireland IE Switzerland CH

Italy IT Turkey TR

Latvia LV United Kingdom GB

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

296

Instructions d’installation professionnelle (WAC6553D-E)

Veuillez noter que l’appareil etant dedie a une fonction unique, il doit etre utilise avec notre logiciel proprietaire de divertissement interactif . Ce

produit sera propose par un reseau de distribution controle et installe par des professionels; il ne sera pas propose au grand public par le reseau

de la grande distribution.

1Installation

Ce produit est destine a un usage specifique et doit etre installe par un personnel qualifie maitrisant les radiofrequences et les regles s’y

rapportant. L’installation et les reglages ne doivent pas etre modifies par l’utilisateur final.

2Emplacement d’installation

En usage normal, afin de respecter les exigences reglementaires concernant l’exposition aux radiofrequences, ce produit doit etre installe de

facon a respecter une distance de 30 cm entre l‘antenne emettrice et les personnes.

3Antenn externe.

Utiliser uniiquement les antennes approuvees par le fabricant. L’utilisation d’autres antennes peut conduire a un niveau de rayonnement

essentiel ou non essentiel depassant les niveaux limites definis par FCC/IC, ce qui est interdit.

4Procedure d’installation

Consulter le manuel d’utilisation.

5Avertissement

Choisir avec soin la position d’installation et s’assurer que la puissance de sortie ne depasse pas les limites en vigueur. La violation de cette regle

peut conduire a de serieuses penalites federales.

Safety Warnings

Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

Do not store things on the device.

Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an

enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.

Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified

service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.

Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.

Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to

a power outlet.

Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor

or cord.

Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V

AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the

device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.

Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at

the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this

product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.

This device (WAC6553D-E, WAC6552D-S) must be grounded by qualified service personnel. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate

the device in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the qualified service personnel if you are uncertain that suitable

grounding is available.

The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power

supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,

For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.

Environment statement

ErP (Energy-related Products) (NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC, NWA5123-AC HD,

WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S)

Zyxel products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published

Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called

as «ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power

consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or

Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or

Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.

For wireless setting, please refer to the chapter about wireless settings for more detail.

European Union — Disposal and Recycling Information

The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic

waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of

your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.

Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt

werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der

Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt

und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

297

El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la

doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el

producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y

medioambiental.

Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures

ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée

de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l’environnement et la santé humaine.

Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.

Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta

separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l’ambiente e la salute umana.

Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når

slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att

göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.

台灣

以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區

第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司,商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。

第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。

前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。

無線資訊傳輸設備避免影響附近雷達系統之操作。

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA1123-ACv2) 實測值為:0.316 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA1123AC PRO) 實測值為:0.448 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA1123AC HD) 實測值為:0.685 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA1302-AC) 測值為:0.109 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA5123-AC) 測值為:0.316 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6503D-S) 測值為:0.744 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6502D-S) 測值為:0.320 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6502D-E) 測值為:0.403 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6553D-E) 測值為:0.539 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 30 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6103D-I) 測值為:0.448 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC5302D-S) 測值為:0.109 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (NWA5123AC HD) 實測值為:0.685 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2,送測產品 (WAC6303D-S) 測值為:0.349 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm

無線資訊傳輸設備忍受合法通信之干擾且不得干擾合法通信;如造成干擾,應立即停用,俟無干擾之虞,始得繼續使用。

無線資訊傳輸設備的製造廠商應確保頻率穩定性,如依製造廠商使用手冊上所述正常操作,發射的信號應維持於操作頻帶中。

無線資訊傳輸設備必須具備安全功能,以保護未經授權之一方任意更改軟體進而避免發射機操作於非經認證之頻率、輸出功率、調變形式或其他射頻參數設

定。

使用無線產品時,應避免影響附近雷達系統之操作。

高增益指向性天線只得應用於固定式點對點系統。

專業安裝警語: (WAC6553D-E)

以下訊息僅適用於產品屬於專業安裝並銷售至台灣地區

本器材須經專業工程人員安裝及設定,始得設置使用,且不得直接販售給一般消費者。

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

298

安全警告

為了您的安全,請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :

請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。

避免設備接觸任何液體 — 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。

灰塵及污物 — 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。

雷雨天氣時,不要安裝,使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。

切勿重摔或撞擊設備,並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。

若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。

請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。

如果更換不正確之電池型式,會有爆炸的風險,請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。

請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。

請勿將設備解體。

請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔,空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。

請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC,歐洲是 230V AC)。

假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞,請從插座拔除,若您還繼續插電使用,會有觸電死亡的風險。

請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線,若有毀損,請直接聯絡您購買的店家,購買一個新的電源變壓器。

請勿將此設備安裝於室外,此設備僅適合放置於室內。

請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。

請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。

請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。

產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分,以下警語將適用 :

- 對永久連接之設備, 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置;

- 對插接式之設備, 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。

About the Symbols

Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage.

The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the

contents.

Explanation of the Symbols

Viewing Certifications

Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.

Zyxel Limited Warranty

Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the

Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local

distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product

have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or

components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to

proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,

and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by

an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties,

express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held

liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the

device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.

SYMBOL EXPLANATION

Alternating current (AC):

AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction.

Direct current (DC):

DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers.

Earth; ground:

A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor.

Class II equipment:

The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or

reinforced insulation.

Appendix D Legal Information

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

299

Registration

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com.

Open Source Licenses

This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided

with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or Zyxel

Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.

To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

300

Index

Symbols

Numbers

802.11k 20, 22, 23

802.11r 20, 22, 23

802.11v 20, 22, 23

A

AC. See AP Controller

access 53

access privileges 17

access users 123

see also users 123

admin users 123

multiple logins 128

see also users 123

alerts 196, 200, 201, 203, 204, 205

antenna switch 222

AP Controller 20, 21, 23, 26

applications

MBSSID 17

Repeater 14

Assisted Roaming. See 802.11k/v

B

backing up configuration files 208

Basic Service Set

see BSS

Bluetooth

BLE. See Bluetooth Low Energy

advertisements 121

advertising settings 122

BLE 120

Bluetooth Low Energy 20, 22, 23, 120

Bluetooth Smart 120

iBeacon 120

iBeacon ID 120

major 120

minor 120

UUID 120

UUID format 122

boot module 213

BSS 17

C

CA

and certificates 156

CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates

CAPWAP 94

CEF (Common Event Format) 198, 203

Certificate Authority (CA)

see certificates

Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) 161

Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 156

vs OCSP 170

certificates 155

advantages of 156

and CA 156

and FTP 189

and HTTPS 177

and SSH 186

and WWW 178

certification path 156, 163, 168

expired 156

factory-default 156

file formats 156

fingerprints 164, 169

importing 159

not used for encryption 156

revoked 156

self-signed 156, 160

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

301

serial number 163, 168

storage space 158, 166

thumbprint algorithms 157

thumbprints 157

used for authentication 156

verifying fingerprints 157

certification requests 160, 161

certifications

viewing 298

channel 18

CLI 32, 57

button 57

messages 57

popup window 57

Reference Guide 2

cold start 65

commands 32

sent by Web Configurator 57

Common Event Format (CEF) 198, 203

comparison table 19, 21, 22

configuration

information 217, 235

configuration files 206

at restart 208

backing up 208

downloading 209

downloading with FTP 189

editing 206

how applied 207

lastgood.conf 208, 210

managing 207

startup-config.conf 210

startup-config-bad.conf 208

syntax 206

system-default.conf 210

uploading 211

uploading with FTP 189

use without restart 206

contact information 281

cookies 53

copyright 287

CPU usage 68, 70

current date/time 68, 173

daylight savings 174

setting manually 175

time server 176

customer support 281

D

date 173

daylight savings 174

DCS 106

DHCP 172

and domain name 172

diagnostics 217, 235

disclaimer 287

domain name 172

dual radios 18

dual-radio application 18

dynamic channel selection 106

E

e-mail

daily statistics report 194

encryption 14

ESSID 246

Extended Service Set IDentification 130

F

Fast Roaming. See 802.11r

FCC interference statement 287

file extensions

configuration files 206

shell scripts 206

file manager 206

Firefox 53

firmware

and restart 212

boot module, see boot module

current version 68, 213

getting updated 212

uploading 212, 213

uploading with FTP 189

flash usage 68

FTP 32, 189

and certificates 189

with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 189

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

302

G

Guide

CLI Reference 2

H

HTTP

over SSL, see HTTPS

redirect to HTTPS 178

vs HTTPS 177

HTTPS 177

and certificates 177

authenticating clients 177

avoiding warning messages 180

example 178

vs HTTP 177

with Internet Explorer 179

with Netscape Navigator 179

HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer,

see HTTPS

I

IEEE 802.1x 131

interface

status 69

interfaces

as DHCP servers 172

interference 18

Internet Explorer 53

Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6

IP Address 94, 231

gateway IP address 94

IP subnet 94

IPv6 273

addressing 273

EUI-64 275

global address 273

interface ID 275

link-local address 273

Neighbor Discovery Protocol 273

ping 273

prefix 273

prefix length 273

stateless autoconfiguration 275

unspecified address 274

J

Java

permissions 53

JavaScripts 53

K

key pairs 155

L

lastgood.conf 208, 210

layer-2 isolation 147

example 147

MAC 148

LED suppression 219

LEDs 34

Blinking 43, 45, 47, 49, 51

load balancing 106

Locator LED 220

log messages

categories 201, 203, 204, 205

debugging 91

regular 91

types of 91

logout

Web Configurator 57

logs

e-mail profiles 196

e-mailing log messages 93, 200

formats 198

log consolidation 201

settings 196

syslog servers 196

system 196

types of 196

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

303

M

MAC address

range 68

Management Information Base (MIB) 190, 191

Management Mode

CAPWAP and DHCP 95

management mode 24

Management, NCC 24

Management, Standalone 24

managing the device

good habits 32

using FTP. See FTP.

MBSSID 17

memory usage 68, 71

messages

CLI 57

mode, default 24

model name 67

My Certificates, see also certificates 158

N

NCC. See Nebula Control Center

Nebula Control Center 24

Netscape Navigator 53

Network Time Protocol (NTP) 175

O

objects

certificates 155

users, account

user 123

Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) 170

vs CRL 170

overview 13, 65, 227

P

pop-up windows 53

power off 66

power on 65

product registration 299

Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 156

public-private key pairs 155

R

radio 18

Radio Frequency monitor 13

reboot 65, 224

vs reset 224

Reference Guide, CLI 2

registration

product 299

remote management

FTP, see FTP

Telnet 188

WWW, see WWW

reports

daily 194

daily e-mail 194

reset 247

vs reboot 224

vs shutdown 225

RESET button 66, 247

restart 224

RF interference 18

RF monitor. See Radio Frequency Monitor

RFC

2510 (Certificate Management Protocol or

CMP) 161

Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm

(RSA) 160

RSA 160, 168, 169

RSSI threshold 137

S

SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) 161

screen resolution 53

Secure Socket Layer, see SSL

serial number 68

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

304

service control

and users 176

limitations 176

timeouts 176

Service Set 130

Service Set Identifier

see SSID

shell scripts 206

downloading 215, 235

editing 214, 234

how applied 207

managing 214, 234

syntax 206

uploading 216, 235

shutdown 66, 225

vs reset 225

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) 161

Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP

SNMP 190

agents 190

Get 190

GetNext 190

Manager 190

managers 190

MIB 190, 191

network components 190

Set 190

Trap 191

traps 191

versions 190

SSH 184

and certificates 186

client requirements 186

encryption methods 186

for secure Telnet 187

how connection is established 185

versions 186

with Linux 187

with Microsoft Windows 187

SSID 17

SSID profile

pre-configured 17

SSID profiles 17

SSL 177

starting the device 65

startup-config.conf 210

if errors 208

missing at restart 208

present at restart 208

startup-config-bad.conf 208

station 106

statistics

daily e-mail report 194

status 229

stopping the device 65

supported browsers 53

syslog 198, 203

syslog servers, see also logs

system log, see logs

system name 67, 172

system uptime 68

system-default.conf 210

T

Telnet 188

with SSH 187

time 173

time servers (default) 175

trademarks 287

Transport Layer Security (TLS) 189

troubleshooting 217, 235

Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 165

U

upgrading

firmware 212

uploading

configuration files 211

firmware 212

shell scripts 214, 234

usage

CPU 68, 70

flash 68

memory 68, 71

onboard flash 68

user authentication 123

user name

rules 124

Index

NWA/WAC/WAX Series User’s Guide

305

user objects 123

users 123

access, see also access users

admin (type) 123

admin, see also admin users

and service control 176

currently logged in 69

default lease time 127, 129

default reauthentication time 127, 129

lease time 126

limited-admin (type) 123

lockout 128

reauthentication time 126

types of 123

user (type) 123

user names 124

V

Vantage Report (VRPT) 198, 203

Virtual Local Area Network 99

VLAN 99

introduction 99

VRPT (Vantage Report) 198, 203

W

warm start 65

warranty 298

note 298

WDS 14

Web Configurator 31, 53

access 53

requirements 53

supported browsers 53

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 131

wireless channel 246

wireless client 106

Wireless Distribution System (WDS) 14

wireless LAN 246

Wireless network

overview 105

wireless network

example 105

wireless profile 130

layer-2 isolation 130

MAC filtering 130

radio 130

security 130

SSID 130

wireless security 17, 246

wireless station 106

Wizard Setup 73

WLAN interface 18

WPA2 131

WWW 177

and certificates 178

see also HTTP, HTTPS 177

Z

ZDP 27

ZON Utility 27

ZyXEL Discovery Protocol 27

Search by model number

Not sure how to find model number? Click here

Model Material Version OS Language Release Date Download Checksum
NWA1123-AC PRO Firmware 6.28(ABHD.0)C0 English March 21, 2023 Download File


Download File 2

NWA1123-AC PRO Datasheet 11 English September 05, 2022 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Firmware 6.25(ABHD.8)C0 English April 08, 2022 Download File


Download File 2

NWA1123-AC PRO Firmware 6.25(ABHD.7)C0 English March 09, 2022 Download File


Download File 2

NWA1123-AC PRO Antenna Specification Matrix 2 English March 07, 2022 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO CLI Reference Guide V6.25 English January 24, 2022 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO User’s Guide V6.20 English July 12, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Certification
NWA1123ACPRO, Regulation Certificates for RF, NCC Certificate/ Regulation Report
002.351-03-00274 Chinese June 17, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Certification
NWA1123ACPRO, Regulation Certificates for EMC, CE Certificate/ Regulation Report
002.351-01-00681 English June 17, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Certification
NWA1123ACPRO, Regulation Certificates for EMC, FCC Certificate/ Regulation Report
002.351-01-00680 English June 17, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Certification
NWA1123ACPRO, Regulation Certificates for Safety, CE-LVD Certificate/ Regulation Report
002.351-02-00455 English May 31, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO MIB File 6 English April 09, 2021 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Quick Start Guide 003 Multiple languages October 20, 2020 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Certification
NWA1123ACPRO, Regulation Certificates for RF, FCC ID Certificate/ Regulation Report
001.351-03-00489 English October 08, 2020 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Declaration
NWA1123ACPRO, DoC, CE
005.214-01-00723 English August 20, 2020 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Declaration
NWA1123ACPRO, DoC, Taiwan RoHS
001.214-01-00940 Chinese December 27, 2017 Download File

NWA1123-AC PRO Product Icon 1 English May 25, 2017 Download File

Если вы ищете решение для создания надежной и быстрой беспроводной сети, то вы обязательно должны обратить внимание на Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro. Это передовой точка доступа, предлагающий мощность, скорость и надежность. В этой статье вы найдете полное руководство по настройке и использованию модели Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro.

Преимущества модели Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro

Одним из главных преимуществ данной модели является ускоренная безопасность. Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro имеет встроенный контроллер брандмауэра, который защищает вашу сеть от различных угроз и вредоносных программ. Кроме того, данная модель поддерживает автоматическое обновление, что гарантирует стабильную работу безопасной сети.

Вторым значительным преимуществом является высокая скорость передачи данных. Данная модель поддерживает беспроводной стандарт 802.11ac, который обеспечивает высокую скорость передачи данных до 1300 Мбит/c. Это позволяет использовать Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro для работы с большими объемами данных.

Третьим преимуществом данной модели является расширяемость. Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro поддерживает работу в режиме моста, repeater и WDS. Это позволяет вам гибко настраивать работу сети и расширять ее покрытие.

В заключение, Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro — это передовая модель точки доступа, которая обеспечивает высокую скорость передачи данных и надежность безопасности. Благодаря расширенным возможностям настройки и использования, данная модель является идеальным решением для создания стабильной беспроводной сети в офисе или дома.

Содержание

  1. Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro инструкция: обзор устройства и его возможности
  2. Шаг 1: Распаковка и подготовка устройства к работе
  3. Шаг 2: Подключение Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro к сети
  4. Шаг 3: Настройка Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro через веб-интерфейс
  5. Шаг 4: Основные параметры настройки Wi-Fi сети
  6. Шаг 5: Дополнительные функции и возможности Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro

Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro инструкция: обзор устройства и его возможности

Благодаря встроенной технологии Beamforming, точка доступа может автоматически определить расположение и направление подключенных устройств, направляя сигнал непосредственно к ним. Это позволяет существенно увеличить зону покрытия Wi-Fi и обеспечить стабильное и высокоскоростное подключение для каждого пользователя.

Устройство поддерживает двухдиапазонное подключение, что делает его идеальным выбором для одновременного использования в сетях с различными типами устройств. Также оно обладает возможностью работы в режиме гостевой сети, что позволяет создать отдельную безопасную Wi-Fi сеть для гостей без доступа к основной сети.

Для обеспечения безопасности передачи данных, в устройстве реализованы различные методы шифрования, включая WPA2 и автоматическое создание скрытой сети. Это обеспечивает надежную защиту от несанкционированного доступа к сети и утечки конфиденциальной информации.

Зyxel nwa1123 ac pro оснащено удобным и интуитивно понятным веб-интерфейсом управления, который позволяет легко настроить различные параметры сети. Пользователь может управлять точкой доступа как локально, так и удаленно через Интернет. Устройство также поддерживает возможность создания дополнительных виртуальных сетей, что позволяет организовать отдельные Wi-Fi сети для различных групп пользователей.

Все эти возможности делают Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro идеальным выбором для создания стабильной и безопасной беспроводной сети в офисе или домашней среде. Устройство предлагает высокую производительность, широкий функционал и простое в использовании управление.

Шаг 1: Распаковка и подготовка устройства к работе

Перед началом использования устройства Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro необходимо выполнить следующие действия:

  1. Распакуйте устройство и проверьте комплектацию: убедитесь, что в комплекте имеются все необходимые аксессуары, такие как блок питания, монтажные кронштейны и Ethernet-кабель.
  2. Подготовьте рабочее место: убедитесь, что у вас есть достаточно пространства для размещения устройства и его подключения к сети. Также убедитесь, что рабочее место обеспечивает хорошую вентиляцию и не подвержено попаданию влаги.
  3. Подключите устройство к источнику питания: используя блок питания, подключите устройство к сети электропитания. Убедитесь, что вы используете подходящий источник питания и что напряжение соответствует требованиям устройства.
  4. Подключите устройство к сети: используя Ethernet-кабель, подключите один конец к порту LAN на устройстве, а другой конец – к сетевому коммутатору или маршрутизатору.
  5. Дождитесь загрузки устройства: после подключения к питанию и сети устройство должно загрузиться в течение нескольких минут. Дождитесь, пока индикаторы на устройстве покажут, что оно готово к работе.

После выполнения указанных шагов устройство Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro будет готово к настройке и использованию.

Шаг 2: Подключение Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro к сети

Подключите адаптер питания в разъем питания на задней панели устройства и вставьте его в розетку.

Подключите один конец сетевого кабеля в порт LAN на задней панели Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro, а другой конец подключите к свитчу или шлюзу вашей локальной сети.

Дождитесь, пока устройство завершит процесс загрузки. В этот момент индикатор питания на передней панели должен загореться зеленым цветом.

Проверьте, что ваш компьютер или другое сетевое устройство находится в той же подсети, что и Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro.

Убедитесь, что ваше сетевое устройство может получать IP-адрес автоматически. Если вы используете статический IP-адрес, убедитесь, что он настроен правильно в соответствии с настройками вашей сети.

Подключение Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro к сети завершено. Теперь вы можете провести настройку устройства и его дальнейшую эксплуатацию.

Шаг 3: Настройка Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro через веб-интерфейс

После подключения Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro к сети, вы можете настроить его с помощью веб-интерфейса.

Шаг 1: Откройте веб-браузер и введите IP-адрес устройства в адресной строке. По умолчанию IP-адрес — 192.168.1.2.

Примечание: Убедитесь, что ваш компьютер находится в той же сети, что и Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro.

Шаг 2: Введите имя пользователя и пароль для доступа к веб-интерфейсу. По умолчанию имя пользователя — admin, пароль — 1234.

Шаг 3: После входа в веб-интерфейс, вы сможете настроить различные параметры, такие как тип сети, безопасность, SSID и другие. Обязательно сохраните изменения после завершения настройки.

Шаг 4: Перезагрузите устройство, чтобы применить все настройки.

Обратите внимание, что эти шаги могут незначительно отличаться, в зависимости от версии программного обеспечения вашего устройства.

Шаг 4: Основные параметры настройки Wi-Fi сети

1. Подключите Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro к вашему компьютеру с помощью Ethernet-кабеля и введите IP-адрес веб-интерфейса в адресную строку вашего веб-браузера.

2. Войдите в веб-интерфейс, используя ваше имя пользователя и пароль. По умолчанию они установлены на «admin».

3. Найдите раздел «Wi-Fi настройки» или «Настройки Wi-Fi» и выберите его.

4. В этом разделе вы можете задать имя (SSID) для вашей Wi-Fi сети. Выберите уникальное имя, которое будет легко запомнить и отличить от других сетей.

5. Задайте тип безопасности для вашей Wi-Fi сети. Рекомендуется использовать WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), так как он обеспечивает высокий уровень защиты.

6. Задайте пароль для вашей Wi-Fi сети. Пароль должен быть достаточно длинным и сложным, чтобы обеспечить безопасность вашей сети.

7. Если вы хотите ограничить доступ к вашей Wi-Fi сети, вы можете настроить список доступа по MAC-адресам. Добавьте MAC-адреса устройств, которым вы разрешаете подключение к сети.

8. После задания всех необходимых параметров сохраните изменения и перезапустите Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro.

Теперь вы настроили основные параметры для вашей Wi-Fi сети на Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro. Вы можете подключать свои устройства к этой сети и наслаждаться беспроводным интернетом.

Шаг 5: Дополнительные функции и возможности Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro

Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro предлагает множество дополнительных функций и возможностей, которые помогут вам настроить и использовать его эффективно. В этом разделе мы рассмотрим некоторые из них.

  • Функция гостевого доступа: Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro позволяет настроить отдельную безопасную беспроводную сеть для гостей. Гости смогут подключиться к этой сети, при этом не имея доступа к основной сети.
  • Контроль пропускной способности: Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro предлагает возможность ограничить пропускную способность интернет-соединения для отдельных пользователей или групп пользователей. Вы можете установить максимальные значения для загрузки и загрузки, чтобы справиться с перегрузками сети.
  • Управление беспроводными клиентами: Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro позволяет контролировать и управлять доступом беспроводных клиентов. Вы можете блокировать или разрешать доступ определенным устройствам к сети.
  • Множество режимов работы: Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro поддерживает различные режимы работы, включая точку доступа, мост или клиента. Вы можете выбрать соответствующий режим в зависимости от ваших потребностей.
  • Поддержка VLAN: Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro поддерживает возможность создания виртуальных локальных сетей (VLAN), позволяя разделять и управлять трафиком между различными сегментами сети.

Это лишь некоторые из возможностей Zyxel nwa1123 ac pro. С помощью этих функций вы сможете настроить сеть согласно вашим требованиям и обеспечить безопасность и эффективность работы вашей беспроводной сети.

Zyxel

ZYXEL NWA1123-AC PRO 802.11ac Dual-Radio точка доступа PoE с двойным креплением

ПРОДУКТЫ

Установка оборудования

аппаратные средства

Подключите порт UPLINK / PoE к сети маршрутизатора через коммутатор PoE или инжектор PoE (30 Вт).
Примечание: Светодиод управления продолжает мигать зеленым, пока не будет завершено облачное управление или автономная настройка. Инжектор PoE может не входить в комплект поставки. Пожалуйста, свяжитесь с вашим поставщиком.

Вариант А Управление облаком

Вариант 1: Используйте MAC-адрес и серийный номер для добавления устройства в NCC1 изображение 2 изображение

Выполните следующие действия, чтобы управлять NWA1123-AC PRO через облачную систему управления сетью Zyxel.
Примечание: Убедитесь, что у подключенного маршрутизатора есть доступ в Интернет.

  1. Перейти в Центр управления туманностью Zyxel (NCC) webсайт (https://nebula.zyxel.com). Нажмите «Войти», и вы будете перенаправлены на myZyxel.com страница портала. Зарегистрируйте учетную запись myZyxel и войдите в систему.
  2. Создайте организацию и сайт (сеть) в НКЦ.
  3. Введите MAC-адрес и серийный номер (S / N) NWA1123-AC PRO в локальной сети (см. Этикетку на устройстве) на экране конфигурации NCC.
    Примечание: NWA1123-AC PRO автоматически перейдет в режим управления облаком и перезапустится после регистрации на сайте. См. Руководство пользователя NCC для получения дополнительной информации о настройке NWA1123-AC PRO через NCC.

Вариант 2: Используйте приложение Nebula, чтобы добавить устройство3 изображение

Загрузите и откройте приложение Zyxel Nebula Mobile. Войдите в свою учетную запись myZyxel.
Создайте организацию и сайт или выберите существующий сайт. Отсканируйте QR-код NWA1123-AC PRO, чтобы добавить его на сайт. (Вы можете найти QR-код в web на приборной панели конфигуратора или на этикетке на устройстве или его коробке, изготовленных после 15 декабря 2017 г.)
Примечание: NWA1123-AC PRO автоматически перейдет в режим управления облаком и перезапустится после регистрации на сайте.

Вариант B Автономная конфигурация

1-a Беспроводное соединение4 изображение

Если вы не хотите управлять NWA1123-AC PRO через Zyxel NCC, выполните следующие действия, чтобы настроить NWA1123-AC PRO (в автономном режиме).

На компьютере с поддержкой Wi-Fi найдите имя сети WiFi NWA1123-AC PRO по умолчанию (Zyxel-xxxx, где xxxx — это последние четыре символа MAC-адреса) и подключитесь к нему.
Откройте web браузер и введите «http://1.1.1.1» для начальной настройки. Введите имя пользователя по умолчанию (admin) и пароль (1234). Щелкните Войти.

1-б Проводное соединение

5 изображение

С помощью кабеля Ethernet подключите компьютер к порту LAN1 NWA1123-AC PRO.
Используйте назначенный DHCP IP-адрес или статический IP-адрес по умолчанию «http://192.168.1.2» для доступа к web конфигуратор. Убедитесь, что IP-адрес вашего компьютера находится в той же подсети, что и NWA1123-AC PRO.

6 изображение

Мастер появится автоматически. Используйте мастер для настройки NWA1123-AC PRO. Примечание. Применение изменений мастера занимает 1-2 минуты. Индикатор питания будет попеременно мигать красным и зеленым. Когда система будет готова, светодиоды питания и WiFi загорятся зеленым светом. Проверьте экран приборной панели и запишите IP-адрес NWA1123-AC PRO на случай, если вам понадобится доступ к нему. web снова конфигуратор.
Примечание: 1.1.1.1 предназначен только для начальной настройки. Его нельзя использовать после настройки NWA1123-AC PRO.
Используйте новые настройки беспроводной сети NWA1123-AC PRO (SSID и ключ) для повторного подключения к сети WiFi NWA1123-AC PRO для доступа в Интернет, если вы измените их в мастере.

Настенный / потолочный монтаж

7 изображение

  • Настенное крепление: Установите антенный переключатель NWA1123-AC PRO в положение WALL. Просверлите два отверстия для пластиковых дюбелей (A) на расстоянии 64.1 мм друг от друга. Вставьте заглушки в стену.
  • Монтаж на потолке: Установите антенный переключатель NWA1123-AC PRO в положение CEILING. Вкрутите саморезы для гипсокартона (C) в потолок на расстоянии 64.1 мм друг от друга.

8 изображение

Вставьте два крепежных винта через отверстия на кронштейне (B) в дюбели / анкеры, чтобы закрепить кронштейн на стене / потолке. Убедитесь, что винты плотно и надежно прикреплены к стене / потолку.
После того, как кронштейн прикреплен к стене / потолку, выровняйте
Порт UPLINK / PoE на NWA1123-AC PRO с выступом монтажного кронштейна (B). Вставьте NWA1123-AC PRO и поверните его вправо до щелчка.

Zyxel

Документы / Ресурсы

Рекомендации

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Zyxel nas326 инструкция на русском
  • Zyxel mes3500 24 инструкция на русском
  • Zyxel keenetic ultra инструкция по настройке
  • Zyxel keenetic omni ii инструкция
  • Zyxel keenetic lite iii инструкция